Canon Imageprograf W6400 Users Manual User's Guide

If not then W6400UG_Us Manual: ://s.canon.com/cpr/software/wideformat/W6400_Manuals/W6400UG_Us

W6400 to the manual 50e3ced5-d758-4ce5-b29d-21055202215b

2015-01-23

: Canon Canon-Imageprograf-W6400-Users-Manual-241456 canon-imageprograf-w6400-users-manual-241456 canon pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 404

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TOP

User’s Guide
Quick Menu
Loading Roll Media
Unexpected Printing Results
Handling Jams
Responding to Error Messages
When Ink Runs Out
List of Operation Panel Settings
Printer Driver

Chapter 1 Basic Procedures

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2 Using a Variety of Media

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Chapter 3 Printing Methods for Different
Objectives

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 4 Maintaining the Printer

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Network Environment

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7 Operation of the Function
Menus

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide
Windows

Macintosh

imagePROGRAF HDI Driver Guide

Contents

Windows

Media Configuration Tool Guide
i

How to Use This Guide

Windows

Macintosh

Index

How to Use This Guide

TOP

How to Use This Guide

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

How to Use the Top Page
• Move to top page, chapter contents pages, contents pages, and indexed pages.
• Move to the previous/next page.
• Return to the previous screen.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

• Move to each chapter contents
page.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

• Move to frequently used topics.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

• Move to the page that describes
how to use this guide.

How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages

•

Click either button to browse
each item of the solutions manual for the selected operating system.
Windows

Macintosh

Contents
Index

How to Use This Guide

TOP

How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages
• Move to top page, chapter contents pages, contents pages, and indexed pages.
• Move to the previous/next page.
• Return to the previous screen.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

• Click the contents page to move to
the topic pages.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

• Click on the ❒ checkbox, then click
the Start Print button to print the
pages of the selected topics. The
print job starts immediately after
you click the Start Print button.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Important
• Clicking the Start Print button begins printing on the printer specified in Set as Default Printer. We recommend that you specify the
printer you want to print on in Set as Default Printer and print on
A4 size plain paper.

iii

How to Use the Top Page

• Other
Click on blue text to move to the referenced pages.

Contents
Index

TOP

Chapter 1 Basic Procedures
Click on the checkbox to print the section contents.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Printer Part Names .....................................................................................1-2
Printer Main Unit .................................................................................................... 1-2

Switching the Printer On and Off ................................................................1-7
Switching the Printer On ........................................................................................ 1-7
Switching the Printer Off ........................................................................................ 1-8
Online and Offline .................................................................................................. 1-9

What’s On the Operation Panel? ..............................................................1-11
Viewing the Display ............................................................................................. 1-11
Using the Operation Panel Buttons ..................................................................... 1-12
Reading Operation Panel Lamps ........................................................................ 1-14

Function Menus ........................................................................................1-15
How to Perform Function Menu Settings ............................................................. 1-17
Menu Settings Summary Tables ......................................................................... 1-19

Printer Driver ............................................................................................1-32
Printer Driver Features ........................................................................................ 1-32
Main Sheet .......................................................................................................... 1-35
Page Setup Sheet .............................................................................................. 1-37
Layout Sheet ....................................................................................................... 1-38
Maintenance Sheet .............................................................................................. 1-39

Printing .....................................................................................................1-40

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Printing From Windows ....................................................................................... 1-40
Printing from a Macintosh .................................................................................... 1-42

Canceling a Print Job ...............................................................................1-46
Canceling a Print Job from Windows ................................................................... 1-46
Canceling a Print Job from Macintosh ................................................................. 1-47

Options .....................................................................................................1-52
Consumables ...........................................................................................1-53
Specifications ...........................................................................................1-56
Basic Environmental Performance ...........................................................1-59

1- 1

How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages

Start Print → Before clicking the Start Print button

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printer Part Names

TOP

Printer Part Names

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

d Maintenance Cartridge
The cartridge that vacuums and collects excess ink.
When you see the message prompt that tells you to
replace the maintenance cartridge, replace the cartridge.
(→ P.4-16)

Printer Main Unit
Front View
a
b

e Maintenance cartridge cover
Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge.
(→ P.4-16)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

f Operation panel
Provides the display panel and the operation panel buttons. For more details, please refer to “Using the Operation Panel Buttons” (→ P.1-12).

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

c
d
e
i

a Upper cover
Remove this cover to install the printhead, to load media,
or to remove sheets of paper jammed in the printer.
(→ P.4-11, P.6-35)
b Cutting groove
When you cut the media manually, the cut is done along
this groove.
c Output assist guides
Guides the media output and keeps if from floating out of
position. Pull this guide out before printing.

1- 2

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

g Right cover
Open to replace ink tanks.
h Stand (optional outside the U.S.A.)
This is a table designed specially for this printer. Casters
are attached to the legs to make it easy to move.
i Output stacker (provided with optional stand)
A cloth tray that catches print media ejected from the
printer.
j Stopper
The part that locks the casters of the printer stand.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printer Part Names

TOP

Back View

Interface connection point on the back
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
a

c
d
e
f

a Release lever
The lever that releases the media. Push this lever toward
the back to release pressure when you load media, when
you need to shift the paper manually, or when you must
clean inside the printer.
b Lift handles
Grasp the handles provided on the left and right side to
lift or move the printer.
c Power connector
Provides a connection point for the printer power cord.
d Roll holder slot
This groove guides the roll holder. (→ P.2-26)
e Holder stopper
The part that fastens the roll media to the roll holder.
(→ P.2-26)
f Roll holder
The holder where the roll media is loaded. (→ P.2-26)
g Accessory pocket
Holds the printer instructions, tools for assembly, and
extra ink tanks.

1- 3

a Expansion board slot
Provided for network interface or IEEE1394 expansion
board. Remove the two screws and insert the board.
(→ Quick Start Guide)
b USB port
This is the communication port for USB 2.0 Hi-Speed.
Connect the USB cable here to connect the printer to the
computer via USB. (→ Quick Start Guide)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printer Part Names

TOP

Inside the Upper Cover

f Upper cover stopper
This arm prevents the upper cover from falling. To close
the upper cover, just lift and hold the stopper up then
close the upper cover.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
a
b
c
d
e

a Carriage rail
The carriage moves on this rail.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

b Paper restraint
An important part for paper feed. The plate keeps the
paper straight in the paper path.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

c Platen
The printhead moves across the platen when it prints. A
suction port is provided on the front surface to prevent
the media from floating out of position.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

d Borderless print ink groove
Receives ink that drains from the edges of the media
during borderless printing.
e Media guideline
Media is set so it is parallel to this guideline when roll
media is loaded. (→ P.2-26)

1- 4

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Contents
Index

Printer Part Names

TOP

Carriage (Inside Upper Cover)

f Printhead height adjustment lever
Use to adjust the height of the printhead. You will need to
adjust the height of the printhead for high quality printing,
or depending on the media you use. (→ P.2-40)

f
b

g Carriage
The important part that moves the printhead during printing.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

c
d
e

a Carriage cover
This cover protects the carriage. Open this cover to
replace the printhead. (→ P.4-23)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

b Printhead lock cover
This cover locks and holds the printhead in place. Raise
this cover to release the printhead lock. (→ P.4-26)

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

c Replaceable Printhead
The major component equipped with the print nozzles.
The printer is shipped without the printhead installed;
you must install the printhead after unpacking the printer.
(→ Quick Start Guide)
d Printhead lock lever
This is the lever that locks the printhead lock cover.
Open this lever to open the printhead cover. (→ P.4-26)
e Cutter Blade
The cutter unit that cuts print media automatically.
(→ P.4-29)

1- 5

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printer Part Names

TOP

Inside the Right Front Cover
a
b
c
d
e
f

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
g
h
i
j
k
l

a Y Ink Tank Cover
b M Ink Tank Cover

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

c PM Ink Tank Cover
d C Ink Tank Cover
e PC Ink Tank Cover
f Bk/MBk Ink Tank Covers
These covers lock and protect the ink tanks. Open this
cover to replace an ink tank.
g Y Ink Tank
h M Ink Tank
i PM Ink Tank

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

j C Ink Tank
k PC Ink Tank
l Bk/MBk Ink Tanks
These are the ink tanks. The ink tanks are not installed in
the printer when you unpack it; you must install them
when you set up the printer.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 6

Index

Switching the Printer On and Off

TOP

Switching the Printer On and Off
Follow the procedure below to switch the printer on and off.

Note
z Now we will show you examples of how to use the
printer for normal operations after it has been set up. If
you are not finished setting up the printer, first follow
the instructions in the Quick Start Guide to confirm the
setup and operation of the printer.
z If the printer is connected to a Macintosh computer via
a USB cable and the computer has been shut down,
when the printer is switched on the computer may also
switch on.
If this occurs disconnect the USB cable. (You may be
able to solve the problem by connecting the printer and
Macintosh via a USB hub.)

Switching the Printer On
Switch on the printer before you execute a print job from the
computer.

Press the Power button.
Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

1- 7

Processing to prepare the printer starts after the
Online lamp and Message lamp start flashing. After
preparation processing is completed and media is
loaded, the Online lamp light, and the printer is
ready to print.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Information Power
Data
Message

Online
Bk

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Offline
Menu

If no print media is loaded in the printer when the
printer is switched on, Offline is displayed and the
printer waits for you to load media in the printer.
Information Power
Data
Message

Online
Load Roll Media

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

If the Message lamp is flashing, read the message
on the printer operation display and take the
appropriate action. “Responding to Error Messages”
(→ P.6-2)
If the display or Online lamp do not light, check the
power cord connections at the printer and the power
supply and make sure that they are secure.
(→ Quick Start Guide)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Switching the Printer On and Off

Switching the Printer Off
When you are finished using the printer, follow this
procedure to switch the printer off.

TOP
Press and hold down the Power button until
you see Shut Down.. in the display then
release the button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Information Power
Data

Important
z Never switch the printer off, and never unplug its
power cord during a print job. This could damage the
printer.
z Remove the roll from the printer if you do not intend to
print from the roll for a long period. Leaving the roll
media at the standby position for an extended period
could cause poor feeding.

Look at the display and confirm that a print
job is not in progress.
Information Power
Data
Message

Online
Bk

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Message

Shut Down..
Please Wait..

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Offline
Menu

Please Wait.. is displayed for a few seconds, then
the printer goes off.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Online

Offline
Menu

If you see an error message displayed, follow the
procedure to correct the problem, and make sure the
print job has completed.
If a print job is in progress, wait for the print job to
complete before switching off the printer.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 8

Index

Switching the Printer On and Off

Online and Offline
When the Printer Is Operating
This printer has three operation modes: online, offline
and menu mode. Each mode is described below.
z Online mode
The printer immediately processes a print job sent
from the computer.
z Offline mode
The printer receives a job from the computer but the
job is held in the standby status without processing it.
While the printer is offline, you can load or cut media
manually, access the carriage, and perform other procedures.
The printer also goes offline automatically any time the
printer cannot start processing a print job, such as
when there is no print media loaded, when an error
occurs, and so on.
z Menu mode
The menu mode displays the function menus on the
printer display. Press the buttons on the operation
panel to set or execute the functions in the menus.
Like the offline line mode, this mode places all jobs in
standby status.

TOP
Note
z Use the Use Power Save and Sleep Timer settings
on the printer operation panel to set the sleep mode
on/off timing. When Use Power Save is set On, you
can use the Sleep Timer to set the length of time until
the printer enters sleep mode. (→ P.1-28)
z If the printer remains idle for more than 15 minutes
with the cover closed (if no print jobs are received or if
no operation panel buttons are pressed), the printer
automatically enters the sleep mode to conserve
energy. Only the Online lamp remains on while the
printer is in the sleep mode; the display and other
lamps remain off. The printer awakens from the sleep
mode as soon as it receives a print job or if you press
any button on the operation panel. The printer requires
about 5 seconds to recover from the sleep mode.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 9

Index

Switching the Printer On and Off

TOP

How to Switch Modes

z Offline Mode

Press the Online button to switch the operation mode.

Message

Offline

Feed Paper
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Press the Online button then select the
operation mode.
Every time you press the Online button, the mode
selection changes in this order: Online > Offline >
MAIN MENU.
Online Status

Offline Status

Online
Bk

Offline

Feed Paper

MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Paper Loaded

z Online mode
Information Power
Message

Online
Bk

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Offline
Menu

With Offline displayed on the operation panel, the
Online lamp goes off.
z Menu mode

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Function Menu Display Mode

When Paper Is Not
Loaded or Error
Has Occurred

Data

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Information Power
Data

Online

MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

While MAIN MENU is displayed on the operation
panel, you can use the arrow keys ([ ] [ ] [ ] [
and the OK key to operate the function menus.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

])

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Offline
Menu

With Online displayed on the operation panel, the
Online lamp lights.
If no media is loaded, or if a message is displayed on
the operation panel, the printer will not enter the online
mode even when you press the Online button. Every
time you remove the cause of a printer error, the
printer will automatically enter the online mode.

1- 10

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

What’s On the Operation Panel?

TOP

What’s On the Operation Panel?
The printer operation panel of this printer provides a display
(a), 10 buttons (b) and 5 lamps (c).
z “Viewing the Display” (→ P.1-11)
z “Using the Operation Panel Buttons” (→ P.1-12)
z “Reading Operation Panel Lamps” (→ P.1-14)

Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

c
Online

Print Job Processing
Printing...

z Line 1:
The first line of the display indicates the current
processing status of the printer.
z Line 2:
Displays the job name and other information.

Function Menu mode
Offline
Menu

Viewing the Display
The display indicates the current status of the printer.

Standby
Online
Bk

z Line 1:
The first line of the display indicates the current operating status of the printer.
z Line 2:
The abbreviation for the currently installed black ink
tank (Bk for Photo Black Ink, MBk for Matte Black Ink)
is displayed at the left. (→ P.2-2)
The level of the ink supply in each ink tank is displayed
in the center, and the remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge is displayed at the right.

1- 11

MAIN MENU
Media Type

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

↓

z Line 1:
Displays the name of the menu and menu items.
z Line 2:
Displays each item for selection on the menu.
A right arrow at the right end of the line indicates that
there are more items.
A down arrow at the right end of the line indicates that
there are more sublevels. When both cases exist, you
will see a down arrow and right arrow displaying alternately.

Note
z For more details about the function menus, please
refer to “How to Perform Function Menu Settings”
(→ P.1-17)

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

What’s On the Operation Panel?

Current Selection

z Line 1:
Displays the items on the menu.
z Line 2:
Displays the item or value of the setting.
A setting prefixed with an equals sign (=) indicates the
current selection.

Note
z For more details about the function menus, please
refer to “How to Perform Function Menu Settings”
(→ P.1-17)

Message Display
E02501

Printing stops and the Message lamp starts flashing
when the printer requires servicing. Perform the appropriate procedure when this occurs.
In some cases you can continue printing once a message notifies you that the printer needs servicing. When
the Message lamp lights, press any button to extinguish
the lamp and the message.

Note
z For more details about what to do when an error
message appears, see Chapter 6 “Responding to
Error Messages” (→ P.6-2).

1- 12

Using the Operation Panel Buttons
The buttons on the operation panel are used for the
functions described below.

Media Type
= Plain Paper

ERROR
Rep. Y Ink Tank

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Online

b
Offline
Menu

a Power button
Press this button to switch the printer on and off.
z Printer off:
Press to switch the printer on.
z Printer on:
Press for at least 1 second to display Shut Down.. and
switch the printer off.
b Online button
Press this button to switch printer offline and online and
the menu display.
z Printer online:
Press to switch the printer to offline.
z Printer offline:
Press to switch the menu display.
z Menu display:
Cancels the menu operation mode and switches to the
online mode. Also temporarily suspends a maintenance
cartridge error so you can switch the printer to online
mode after a maintenance cartridge error displays. However, you cannot switch to the online mode when other
messages are displayed or when paper is not set.
z Job processing:
Puts the printer in the pause mode. The current print
job pauses temporarily.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

What’s On the Operation Panel?

TOP
Information Power

Information Power
Data
Message

c
d

1- 13

e
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Message

Online

f
Offline
Menu

c Paper Source button
z Online, Offline, Menu Display Status:
Press and hold for 1 second or more to switch
between Roll Media and Cut Sheet as the feed source.
However, this switching cannot be performed if the
upper cover, right cover, or release lever is open.
d OK button
z Setting value display:
Selects the value or setting, or executes the function,
currently displayed on the operation panel.
e Information button
Displays the submenus. The information about ink, the
maintenance cartridge, media, and printhead height,
printhead service life, and parts service life displays in a
prescribed order on a rolling display. Pressing and holding this button for 3 seconds also starts Head Cleaning
A. (→ P.4-38)
The length of the media remaining also displays if the
function that checks the amount of media remaining on
the roll is switched on.
f Stop/Eject button
z Online, Offline, Menu Display Status:
Press and hold for over 1 second to cancel printing, ink
drying, or eject the media.
z Pause Status:
Press and hold for over 1 seconds to cancel a paused
job and eject the media.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Data

g
h

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

i
j

Offline
Menu

g [ ] button
z Printer offline:
Press and hold for 1 second to move the carriage to
the center of the platen.
z Menu display:
Operates as a function select button to display the previous candidate (menu item or value) for selection.
h [ ] button
z Printer offline:
Does manual feeding from the roll automatically when
you are using the roll as the feed source.
z Menu display:
Press this button to open the next menu level below.
i [ ] button
z Printer offline:
Manually reverse feeds paper onto the roll.
z Menu display:
Press to return one level up and display the previous
menu item.
j [ ] button
z Printer offline:
Press and hold for 1 second to move the carriage to
the center of the platen.
z Menu display:
Operates as a scroll button to display the next candidate (menu item and value) for selection.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

What’s On the Operation Panel?

TOP

Reading Operation Panel Lamps
The lamps on the operation panel indicate the following
states.

a
b
c
d

Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

a Data lamp
z Flashing:
The printer is printing, receiving or processing a print
job.
When the printer is not printing, this indicates that a job
has been stopped and the printer is in the pause
mode, the printer is has received data that it cannot
process, or the firmware is being updated.
z Off:
There are no jobs in the printer.
b Message lamp
z On:
A warning is displayed on the operation panel.
z Flashing:
An error has occurred.
z Off:
The printer is operating normally, or the printer is
switched off.
c Roll Media lamp
z On:
Roll media is selected as the paper source.

1- 14

d Cut Sheet lamp
z On:
Cut sheet is selected as the paper source.
e Online lamp
z On:
The printer is online or the printer is processing a print
job or sleeping.
z Off:
The printer is offline or in pause mode, in menu display
mode, is initializing immediately after power on, or has
been switched off.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

Function Menus
You can use the operation panel to access and use all the
functions built into the printer. You can use the menus to
perform system settings, set up options, clean the
printhead, perform test prints and other functions. You can
press the Information button at any time to view the
submenus and read information about the ink levels, media,
and height of the printhead.

Printer Function Priorities
The settings done on the printer operation panel reset all
the default settings and are applied to all print jobs. However, if the same settings are done with the printer driver
then the printer driver settings have priority when print
jobs are executed.

Function Menu Flow Summaries
The following illustration shows you how the items of the
function menus are organized. Press [ ] or [ ] to display the next item, press [ ] to display the next level
below, or press [ ] to return to the previous level. You
can also press the OK button to enter the settings for
each menu item.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 15

Index

Information

Test Print

System Setup
Maintenance

Interface Setup

Adjust Printer
Rep. Ink Tank
ChangeBkInkType
Med.Detail Set.
Media Type

Chng Head Hght

Force Cutting

Counter
Job Log

(Media Type)

Adjust Length
Adjust Band
Feed Priority
Auto Head Adj.

Color Calib.

EOP Timer

TCP/IP

NetWare

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

Init. Settings

Move Printer
Replace P.head

Date Format
Time Zone
Length Unit
Use Power Save
Sleep Timer
Stop Ink Check
Nozzle Check
Roll Length Set
Chk Remain.Roll
Keep Media Size
Change Cutter
Warning

Reset MediaType
Language

Nozzle Check
Menu Map
Print Job Log
Media Details
Status Print

Version

RAM

Ext. Interface

MAC Address

Error Log

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Head Cleaning B
Head Cleaning A

Cut Count
Coverage

MAC Address
Spanning Tree
Ethernet Type
Comm.Mode
Auto Detect
Print Service
Frame Type
NetWare
IP Setting
Protocol
IP Mode
TCP/IP
Color Calib. K
Color Calib. C
Color Calib. M
Color Calib. Y
Color Calib. PC
Color Calib. PM
Return Defaults

Med.type Wrning
Head Ht. Wrning
Buzzer

Y Ink Tank
M Ink Tank
PM Ink Tank
C Ink Tank
PC Ink Tank
Bk Ink Tank

Interface
Media Type
Print Size
Print Time
Print End Time
Print Start Time
Job Status
Page Count
User Name
Document Name

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Fine Tuning
Advanced Adj.
Standard Adj.
Auto Print
Standard Adj.
Advanced Adj.
Return Defaults
Width Detection
Skew Check Lv.
Correct Smear
CutDustReduct.
Cut Speed
Standard Cutter
VacuumStrngth
Media Thickness
Far End RllMrgn
NearEnd RllMrgn
Scan Wait Time
Drying_Time

Default G/W
Subnet Mask
IP Address
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP

Index
1- 16

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Head Cleaning

z Sub Menus (Information Button)

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
*1 Displayed only when media is loaded.
*6 Displayed only when Network board is installed.
*2 Not displayed during maintenance cartridge warning. *7 Displayed only when Automatic is selected as the IP Mode.
*3 Displayed only during printing.
*8 Displayed only when Manual is selected as the IP Mode.
*4 Displayed only when Band Joint is selected as the Feed Priority.
*5 Displayed only when Print Length is selected as the Feed Priority.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
*7 *8

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
*6 *6 *2 *2
*6
*6
*6
*4 *5

Head Height (L/M/H)
Best Head Hght (L/M/H)
Remaining : (Paper Remaining) m
## Printable
Width : (Paper Width)
(Media Type)

Contents
SUB MENU
Information

*3
*2
*1

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

MAIN MENU
Online

TOP
Function Menus

z MAIN MENU

Function Menus

How to Perform Function Menu Settings

TOP
Press the Online button then select MAIN
MENU.

When you do the function menu settings, press Online to
display the menus, then use the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
OK buttons to operate the menus.

Making Settings
Here we will show you how set the sleep timer as an
example of how to use the operation panel buttons.

MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Note
z Confirm that Use Power Save is switched on. The
sleep timer cannot be set while Use Power Save is
switched off.

If the printer is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
After a few seconds Online is displayed in the
operation panel and the Online lamp lights.

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select
System Setup then press [ ].

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Information Power
Data
Message

Main Menu
System Setup

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Offline
Menu

The next level of the menu is displayed.

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Sleep Timer
then press [ ].

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Information Power
Information Power
Data
Message

Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

System Setup
Sleep Timer

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

The setting value for the selected item appears.

Contents

1- 17

Index

Function Menus

TOP

Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select the
desired setting then press the OK button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Information Power
Data
Message

Sleep Timer
10 min.

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

The selected value is prefixed with an equals sign
(=).

Press the Online button to display Online.
Information Power
Data
Message

Online
Bk

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

The Online lamp lights and the printer is ready to
print.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 18

Index

Function Menus

TOP

Menu Settings Summary Tables
Each menu has the functions described below. A setting value marked with an asterisk (*) is the initial setting for that menu
item.

MAIN MENU
Menu Item
Head Cleaning

Force Cutting

Chng Head Hght
Media Type

1- 19

Setting Values
Head Cleaning A
Head Cleaning B

Function

Cleans the printhead.
Performs stronger cleaning than Head
Cleaning A.
No, Yes
Executes a roll cut at the current position.
However, if the media is cut within 10 cm
from the leading edge the media still feeds
the prescribed distance before the cut is
performed. This menu item is displayed only
while Roll Media is selected for printing.
If the feed distance is very small, the cut is
not performed.
No, Yes
Adjusts the height of the Printhead. (→ P.240)
Plain Paper*, CAD Plain Paper, Plain Selects the type setting for media. Only the
Paper HQ, Recycled Coated, Coated names of the types of media that can be
Paper, HW Coated, Premium Matte, used with the set Bk ink are displayed.
Ex HW Coated, Glossy Photo, Semi- (→ P.2-4)
Gl Photo, HW Glossy Photo, HW
SemiGl Photo, Syn. Paper, Adh. Syn.
Paper, Backlit Film, Flame-Res.
Cloth, Proofing Paper, News Proof 1,
News Proof 2, News Proof 3, FineArt
Photo, FneArt HW Photo, FineArt
Txtr, Canvas Semi-Gl, JPN Paper
Washi, Colored Coated, CAD Trace
Paper, CAD Matte Film, Special 1-5

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

Menu Item
Med. Detail Set
Media Type

Drying Time
Scan Wait Time

NearEnd RllMrgn

TOP
Setting Values

Function

Plain Paper*, CAD Plain Paper, Plain
Paper HQ, Recycled Coated, Coated
Paper, HW Coated, Premium Matte,
Ex HW Coated, Glossy Photo, SemiGl Photo, HW Glossy Photo, HW
SemiGl Photo, Syn. Paper, Adh. Syn.
Paper, Backlight Film, Flame-Res.
Cloth, Proofing Paper, News Proof 1,
News Proof 2, News Proof 3, FineArt
Photo, FneArt HW Photo, FineArt
Txtr, Canvas Semi-Gl, JPN Paper
Washi, Colored Coated, CAD Trace
Paper, CAD Matte Film, Special 1-5
Off, 30 sec., 1 min., 3 min., 5 min, 10
min., 30 min., 60 min.

These are the names of media that you can
select. Only the names of the types of media
that can be used with the set ink tank are
displayed.

Off, 1 sec., 3 sec., 5 sec., 7 sec., 9
sec.

20mm, 5mm

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

An ink drying time interval for each media is
set to allow enough time for a printout to dry
before the next sheet prints.
The printhead can be set to pause after one
pass (a scan) and wait for the ink to dry (this
allows for the absorption properties of
different media). However, the printing time
will be much longer.
This sets the amount of white space to
ensure the quality of printing at the leading
edge.

Important
z If set to 5 mm, the print quality at the
leading edge, or the accuracy of feeding,
may deteriorate, or the surface of the print
may be scratched. Also, ink may stick to
the leading edge.

1- 20

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

Menu Item
Far End RollMrgn

TOP
Setting Values
10mm, 5mm

Media Thickness

Thick, Standard, Thin

VacuumStrngth

Weak, Standard, Strong, Strongest

Standard Cutter

Enable, Disable

Cut speed

Standard, Fast

CutDustReduct

Off*, On

Correct Smear

Off*, On

Function
Sets the amount of white space to ensure
the quality of printing at the trailing edge.

Important
z If set to 5 mm, the print quality at the
leading edge, or the accuracy of feeding,
may deteriorate, or the surface of the print
may be scratched. Also, ink may stick to
the leading edge.
Selects the ideal thickness for the media
type. The printhead alert will display based
on the value of this setting.
Sets the amount of suction on the media on
the platen.
Determines whether the standard, flat blade
cutter is enabled.
Sets the speed of the cutter cutting the
media. Selecting Fast for film and other
media that easily generates cutting dust will
reduce the amount of dust.
When printing on film or other media that
creates a large amount of dust during
cutting, a line is printed at cutting position to
reduce the amount of scattered dust.
Select for media when the printing results is
easily scratched.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 21

Index

Function Menus

Menu Item
Skew Check Lv.

Width Detection

Setting Values
Standard*, Loose, Off

On*, Off, Media Size?

Return Defaults

No, Yes

ChangeBkInkType

No, Yes

Rep. Ink Tank

No, Yes

Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.
Advanced Adj.

1- 22

TOP

No, Yes

Function
When you are printing on Japanese washi
paper or other media of non-standard width,
you can lower the amount of skew detected
or switch this function off. However, if you
switch this function Off, you could cause a
paper jam if the sheet is not loaded perfectly
straight.

Important
z If media is set at a skewed angle while Off,
this could cause jams or fouling the platen.
The Width Detection function can be
switched to Off only when printing on cut
sheets. You can switch width detection off for
Japanese washi or other media of nonstandard widths. If you switch this function
Off, then Media Size? is displayed and you
can enter the width of the media.
This function restores the media type
settings to their default values.
You can switch the black ink tanks based on
the requirements of the print job for different
types of black ink.
When you must change an ink tank during a
print job, the required processing is done so
you can change the ink tank. This menu is
displayed during printing only.
Adjusts the printhead. (→ P.4-40)
Prints the pattern used to adjust nozzle
gaps, print direction, and color gaps; the
printer reads the printed pattern and does
the adjustments automatically based on the
results of the printout.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

TOP

Menu Item
Standard Adj.

No, Yes

Auto Print

On*, Off

Feed Priority

Setting Values

Band Joint*, Print Length

Adjust Band
Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Fine Tuning
Adjust Length

1- 23

No, Yes

-3 ~ 0* ~ +3
-0.70 ~ 0.00* ~ 0.70%

Function
Prints the adjustment pattern used to adjust
the position of the printhead, reads the
results of the pattern, and then automatically
adjusts the values for printhead positioning.
You can set Advanced Adj. to print
automatically immediately after the printhead
is replaced.
Sets the priority for the precision of media
feed. Select Print Length when you want
the media to feed accurately. When Print
Length is selected, color may blur slightly in
the direction of carriage scanning.
Adjusts the amount of line feed for each type
of media. (→ P.4-42)
The printer prints this pattern and uses it to
adjust the amount of feed; it scans the
printout and automatically adjusts the values
for each type of media.
Use with media other than Canon media or
media not approved for output with the
printer. The adjustment value is set
automatically when the printer reads the
printed pattern. However, this requires more
time than Standard Adj. and consumes
more ink.
Allows manual entry of a value to fine adjust
the band adjustment of the media selected
for printing.
Adjusts the amount of stretching and
shrinking for each media type. To set a
longer feed for a media that stretches easily,
adjust the value to the plus (+) side, or adjust
it to the minus (-) side to set a shorter feed
for a media that shrinks easily. This menu is
displayed only when Print Length is
selected for Feed Priority.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

TOP

Menu Item
Color Adj.
Return Defaults
Color Adj. PM
Color Adj. PC
Color Adj. Y
Color Adj. M
Color Adj. C
Color Adj. K
Interface Setup
EOP Timer

Setting Values
Off*, On
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min.,
5 min., 10 min.*, 30 min., 60 min.

TCP/IP

IP Mode

Manual*, Automatic

Protocol
DHCP
BOOTP
RARP
IP Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default G/W

1- 24

Off*, On

0.0.0.0* ~ 255.255.255.255

Function
This restores all color settings at once to 2,
the factory default setting.
You can adjust the density of PM 1, 2*, 3 Y,
M, C, K, PM, PC one by one and perform the
corrections.
The settings can be performed in the range 1
to 3 (the standard factory default setting is
2). Set to 1 for a light adjustment or set to 3
for a dark adjustment.
Sets the job timeout setting for the printer.
Sets the TCP/IP protocol for the network
interface. After setting each TCP/IP item,
select Store Setting to save the settings and
enable them. This menu is displayed only
when the network interface is installed.
(→ P.5-12)
The setting for TCP/IP protocol is locked On.
This setting cannot be changed.
This setting determines whether the IP
address is set automatically or entered
manually.
Sets the type of server when the printer is
set for automatic entry of the IP address.

Sets the printer network information if a fixed
IP address has been set.
Allows entry of the IP address assigned to
the printer, network subnet mask, and
default gateway.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

TOP

Menu Item

Setting Values

NetWare

NetWare
Frame Type

Print Service
AppleTalk

Off*, On
Auto Detect, Ethernet 2, Ethernet
802.2*, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet
SNAP
Bindary Pserver, RPrinter, NDS
Pserver*, NPrinter
On, Off*,

Ethernet Driver

Auto Detect

On*, Off

Comm. Mode
Ethernet Type
Spanning Tree

Half Duplex*, Full Duplex
10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX
Not Use*, Use

MAC Address

1- 25

Function
Sets the network interface for NetWare
protocol. After setting each TCP/IP item,
select Store Setting to save the settings and
enable them. This menu is displayed only
when the network interface is installed.
(→ P.5-35)
Determines whether NetWare protocol is
used.
Selects the frame type to use.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Selects the print service.
Determines whether AppleTalk protocol is
used. After setting each TCP/IP item, select
Store Setting to save the settings and enable
them. This menu is displayed only when the
network interface is installed. (→ P.5-30)
Sets the method of communication for the
network interface board. After setting each
TCP/IP item, select Store Setting to save
the settings and enable them. This menu is
displayed only when the network interface is
installed. (→ P.5-6)
Automatically recognizes the LAN
communication protocol. If set to Off, the
communication method or Ethernet type are
enabled.
Selects the LAN communication method.
Selects the LAN communication speed.
This selection determines whether the LAN
spanning tree signal is received.
Displays the MAC address of the network
interface board.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

TOP

Menu Item

Setting Values

Store Setting
Init. Settings

OK?
OK?

Maintenance
Replace P.head

No, Yes

Move Printer

No, Yes

System Setup
Warning
Buzzer
Head Ht. Wrning

Med.type Wrning

Change Cutter

On*, Off
On*, Off, Check Head Hght

On*, Off

No, Yes

Function
Resets all of the Interface Setup settings to
their factory defaults.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Sets the printer in the replace printhead
mode. This menu is not displayed while the
maintenance cartridge capacity warning is
displayed. (→ P.4-23)
Sets the printer to the mode that enables you
to carry out the procedures required before
transporting the printer to another location.
This menu is not displayed while the
maintenance cartridge capacity warning is
displayed. (→ P.4-32)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Sets the buzzer function. When set to On,
the buzzer sounds when an error occurs.
Determines whether a prompt is issued
when the printhead is not at the correct
height for the print media.
Determines whether a warning is issued
when the media loaded in the printer does
not match the media specified for the print
job.
Prepares the printer so the cutter can be
replaced when replacement is necessary.
After replacement, you can reset the number
of cuts.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 26

Index

Function Menus

Menu Item
Keep Media Size

Chk Remain. Roll

TOP
Setting Values
Off*, On

Off, On*

Function
When switched to On, the print job executes
with the media size specified for the data.
Depending on the size of the margins, some
of the data may be cut off.
When set to Off, the job will print without
cutting off part of the image at the top or
bottom. However, the printout will be
extended by the lengths of the top and
bottom margins.

Important
z When On, part of the image may be cut off.
(→ P.7-5)
When set to Off, the image inside 5 mm
from the top, bottom, left, and right edges
will be printed clearly as the recommended
printing area. However, the printout will be
extended by the lengths of the top and
bottom margins.
When On, the bar code prints when the roll
is removed in order to monitor the amount of
media remaining on each roll.
When Off, the bar code is not printed when
the roll is removed. If this is set to Off, the
edge will be cut off regardless of the roll
paper loading position.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 27

Index

Function Menus

Menu Item
Roll Length Set

Setting Values
## m (meter selected for Length
Unit), ## feet (feet/inch selected for
Length Unit), Manual Setting,
Unknown

Nozzle Check

1 page, 10 pages*, Nozzle check

Stop Ink Check

Bk Ink Tank
PC Ink Tank
C Ink Tank
PM Ink Tank
M Ink Tank
Y Ink Tank
5 min., 10 min., 15 min.*, 20 min.,
30 min., 40 min., 50 min., 60 min.
On, Off

Sleep Timer
Use Power Save

Length Unit

1- 28

TOP

meter*, feet/inch

Function
When the roll supply remaining detection
function is On, the printer sets the media length
when the roll media loaded has no bar code.
This is displayed only when Chk Remain. Roll
is On. Some Length Units are displayed in
meters, and others in feet depending on the
setting. Also, if Manual Setting is selected you
can enter the length directly.
If Unknown is selected, the roll supply remains
function is switched Off.
Allows you to set the number of patterns to
print when a nozzle clogs during an
automatic check.
Switches off the ink level detection function.
(→ P.4-8)

Sets the amount of time the printer remains
idle before it enters sleep mode.
Sets up the printer sleep mode function. If
set to On the printer enters the Sleep Timer
mode to reduce its power consumption and
conserve energy if the covers are closed and
the printer is neither operated nor receives a
print job after the prescribed time has
elapsed. If set to Off, sleep mode is
disabled. (→ P.1-9)
Sets the units used to display the length of
the roll sheet on the display. The units for the
roll length display and the roll supply
remains display are separate.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

Menu Item
Time Zone

Date Format
Language
Reset MediaType
Test Print
Status Print
Menu Map
Print Job Log

1- 29

Nozzle Check

TOP
Setting Values
0:London (GMT)
+1:Paris,Rome
+2:Athens,Cairo
+3:Moscow
+4:Eerevan,Baku
+5:Islamabad
+6:Dacca
+7:Bangkok
+8:Hong Kong
+9:Tokyo,Seoul
+10:Canberra
+11NewCaledonia
+12:Wellington
-12:Eniwetok
-11:Midway is.
-10Hawaii(AHST)
-9:Alaska(AKST)
-8:Oregon (PST)
-7:Arizona(MST)
-6:Texas (CST)
-5:NewYork(EST)
-4:Santiago
-3:Buenos Aires
-2:
-1:Cape Verde
yyyy/mm/dd
dd/mm/yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
English*, Français, Deutsch, Italiano,
Español
No, Yes

Function
You can select a representative city in the
appropriate time zone, along with the
selection of the GMT time difference.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Sets the display format for the date.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Sets the display format for the date.
Media Configuration Tool can be used to
restore the content of changed settings to
their factory defaults.
Prints the printer information and setting
values.
Prints a list of all the items on the MAIN MENU.
Prints a list of information about printed jobs,
including media size and type, amount of ink
consumed, etc.
Prints the nozzle check pattern.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

Menu Item
Media Details
Information
Version
RAM
Ext. Interface
MAC Address
Error Log
Job Log
Document Name
User Name
Page Count
Job Status
Print Start Time
Print End Time
Print Time
Print Size
Media Type
Interface
Coverage
Counter
Cut Count

1- 30

TOP
Setting Values

Function
Prints a list of media type settings.
Displays the version numbers for the printer
unit and the firmware.
Displays the memory capacity of the printer.
Displays the name of the interface that can
be used at the expansion slot.
Displays the MAC address of the printer in
the network. This menu is displayed only
when the network interface is installed.
Displays the most recent error message.
Displays at the end information about the
print job.
Displays the name of the document in the
print job.
Displays the job user name.
Displays the number of pages in the print
job.
Displays the result of the print job
processing.
Displays the time that the print job was
started.
Displays the time that the print jobs ended.
Displays the time elapsed for the print job.
Displays the size of the media used in the
print job.
Displays name of the media type used in the
print job.
Displays the name of the job interface.
Displays the ink density of each color used in
the job.
Displays the number of cuts by the cutter.
You can reset this counter after the cutter
has been replaced.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Function Menus

TOP

Sub Menus
Menu Item

Setting Values

Ink:

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Function
Displays in the center the ink capacity in 7
steps (100%, 80%, 60%, 40%, 20%, 0%)
and no ink.
100%
80%
60%
40%
(100~90%) (90~70%) (70~50%) (50~30%)

20%
0%
(30~6.9%) (6.9~0%)

Displays in seven levels the capacity of ink
that the maintenance cartridge can still
absorb.
~700ml ~600ml ~500ml ~400ml ~300ml ~200ml 200ml~0ml
(7dot) (6dot) (5dot) (4dot) (3dot) (2dot) (1dot)

Width: X
Y
Remaining: Xm
YY Printable

Head Height X
Best Head Hght Y

X: Media Width
Y: Media Type

The width of the media is shown on the top
line, and the type of media is shown on the
bottom line.
X: Roll Remains
When the roll media supply detection is On,
Y: Sheets printable with remaining
this displays the length of the media that
ink.
remains on the roll. Also, while the ink
remains alert is displayed the number of
sheets that can be printed is also displayed.
X: Current printhead position (L, M, H) When the Head Ht. Wrning is On, an alert is
Y: Best position for media (L, M, H)
issued if the current height of the printhead is
lower than the ideal height for the media.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 31

Index

Printer Driver

TOP

Printer Driver

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

The computer uses the printer driver to send the print job to
the printer. This section describes the functions of the
printer driver.

Printer Driver Features
The printer driver presents the items that allow you to
perform the settings for the media type, print quality, page
size, and other important settings. Also, the printer provides
a variety of easy-to-use functions which are described
below. For more details about operation procedures, please
refer to Chapter 3 “Printing Methods for Different
Objectives” and the printer online Help.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Banner Printing

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

You can make long printouts up to 15.24
meters long for vertical or horizontal
banners for hanging (18 m with Mac OS X
or later). (→ P.3-30, P.3-94)

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Enlarged/
Reduced
Printing
Borderless
Printing
The printer can do borderless printing at
the four edges of the media as shown in
the photo. (→ P.3-13, P.3-77)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

You can print and have the image
automatically enlarged or reduced to fit on
the width of the media on the roll. You can
make prints easily that fill the entire width
of the media. (→ P.3-6, P.3-65)

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 32

Index

Printer Driver

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Multiple Page
Printing
You can reduce the size of the image and
print multiple copies on one sheet. Use
this feature to save paper when you need
to only confirm the content.
(→ P.3-24, P.3-89)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Preview Display
Displays a graphic representation of what
the printout will look like by showing the
effects of the printer driver settings. This
allows you to confirm what the print job
will look like before you print it.
(→ P.3-5, P.3-64)

Printing with
Watermarks

Color
Adjustment
You can use the printer driver to adjust the
tones of the colors in your printed
materials. (→ P.3-42, P.3-107)

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Custom Sizes

Contents
You can stamp your printouts with
watermarks or transparent overlays.
(→ P.3-28)

1- 33

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Poster Printing
You enlarge an image and have it print in
sections on several sheets. This is
convenient when you need to paste
together sheets to form one large poster.
(→ P.3-26, P.3-92)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

You an register custom sizes for paper
and other media. (→ P.3-51, P.3-121)

Index

Printer Driver

Default
Settings

Print
Preferences

TOP

POP Ad

Poster

Photo
Photo
Long
(from digital (from
Format
camera) scanner) (Banner)

CAD

Settings that match the purpose of the
document are registered. You can easily
perform print jobs that meet the purpose
of the job. Also, you can register the
content of the settings under a name that
you give it. (→ P.3-2, P.3-59)

Printhead Printhead
Cleaning Adjustment

Adjusting
Line Feed

Maintenance
Photo Black

Matte Black

Nozzle check pattern prints, printhead
cleanings, printhead adjustment, and feed
adjustments can all be performed on the
computer screen.
(→ P.4-36, P.4-38, P.4-40, P.4-42)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 34

Index

Printer Driver

TOP

Main Sheet
The Main sheet provides the following settings.

Print
Preferences

Media Type

Standard:
These settings are best for printing
documents that contain text, images,
and graphics mixed together.
POP Ad:
Best selection for printing sharp, bright
posters for store advertising.
Poster:
Best selection for printing a photograph
centered in a poster.
Photograph
(captured with digital camera):
Best for printing photographs taken with
a digital camera.
Photographs (captured with a scanner):
Best selection when you need faithful
reproduction of color photos captured
with a scanner.
Long Format (Banner):
Best for long print jobs with mixed text
and illustrations in hanging vertical or
horizontal banners.
CAD:
Best choice when you want to print fine,
sharp lines in architectural or
engineering plans.
Use this setting to set the paper or
media type. A print job is performed to
match the special characteristics of the
media. If this setting does not match the
type of media loaded in the printer, this
will cause poor print quality.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 35

Index

Printer Driver

Print Quality

Set

TOP
High:
This print mode places priority on
quality.
Standard:
Prints the printout with normal quality.
Draft:
This print mode places priority on
speed.
Custom Settings:
The job is printed with the processing
method selected by the user. The
Highest selection prints with the best
possible quality.
With Print Quality selected under
Custom Settings, the processing
methods for Print Quality, Resolution,
Enhance Text With Photos, and
Halftones can be set. The items that
can be selected and their settings are
different, depending on the media type
and ink type.

Color:
Uses all the inks to print the job in color.
Monochrome (Photo):
Provides stable monochrome photo
printing with minimal tone change and
enables detailed adjustment of gray
scale gradations and color tones.
Monochrome:
Color Mode
Converts all print data to grayscale and
prints using only the black ink.
Solid Color:
Solid colors are printed differently so
they stand out, light color lines print
sharp.
Black Only:
All areas other than white are printed in
black.
Manual
Allows manual adjustment of color
Color
balance, saturation, brightness, and
Settings
contrast.
Open Preview
After executing the print job, check the
When Print Job image of the on the screen and then
Starts
execute the print.
Follow the procedure below to start the
Status Monitor
Status Monitor.
Displays the version number of the
Version Info.
printer driver.
Returns the settings on the sheets to
Defaults
their initial (default) settings.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 36

Index

Printer Driver

TOP

Page Setup Sheet
The Page Setup sheet provides the following settings.

Page Size
Borderless
Printing

Sets the size of the page for the print
data.
Prints the image with no margin at the
four edges of the sheet. There are
limitations on the width and type of
media. (→ P.2-4, P.3-13, P.3-77)

Enlarged/
Reduced
Printing

Allows you to enlarge or reduce printing.
You can select one of the following
methods to do this.
Automatically sets the enlargement/
Fit Media
reduction proportionally to match the
Size
size selected for the Media Size.
Automatically sets the enlargement/
Fit Roll
reduction proportionally to match the
Paper Width
size selected for the Roll Paper Width.
Allows you to scale the size of the image
Scaling
manually in the range 5% to 600%.
Allows you to specify the actual size of
Media Size
the media where the job will print.
Allows you to select either portrait or
Orientation
landscape printing.
Rotate Page 90 Automatically rotates the image 90
degrees
degrees when print job would result in a
(Conserve
printout with the length smaller than the
Paper)
width. This saves paper.
Specifies whether roll media, roll media
Media Source
(banner), or cut sheets will be used.
Roll Paper
Specifies the width of the roll paper to be
Width
used.
Specifies whether the sheet is cut after
Auto Cut...
printing.
Allows you to define free sizes other
Size Options
than the standard sizes so you can print
do long prints.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 37

Index

Printer Driver

TOP

Layout Sheet
The Print Layout sheet provides the following settings.

When the image to be printed is smaller
than the media, you can set the printer it
does not feed and there is no margin at
the top or bottom. This conserves roll
paper.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print.
If the print results are not what you
Special Settings expect, you can change how the print
job is processed.
No Spaces at
Top or Bottom
(Conserve
Paper)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Page Layout

Watermark

Print Centered
Rotate 180
degrees

1- 38

This feature allows you to print several
pages up on the same sheet or break up
an enlarged image by printing it over
several sheets for a large poster.
Overlays a watermark on the printed
image. You can freely make your own
watermarks (text, text enclosed in
boxes, transparent text) positioned
freely on the page, give them a name,
and register them.
When the image to be printed is smaller
than the sheet, you can print the image
centered so the margins are even.
This feature rotates the image 180
degrees.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printer Driver

TOP

Maintenance Sheet
The Maintenance sheet provides the following settings.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Utility

Update Ink
Information

Open the Status Monitor and display the
Utility sheet. This allows you to perform
nozzle check pattern prints, printhead
cleaning, printhead position adjustment,
and feed adjustment.
The Status Print item is on the
Information tab of the Status Monitor.
Use this setting to set the type of black
ink. Click the Acquire Status button to
set the printer to operate with the black
ink tank mounted in the printer.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 39

Index

Printing

TOP

Printing
Follow the procedure below to start a print job.

Printing From Windows

Operating the Printer

In the software application, select Print from
the File menu.

To print a job from a Windows software application, use the
Print command in the File menu.

Important
z The Windows printer driver for this printer can be used
with Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows
2000, Windows Me, Windows 98, and Windows NT
4.0. The printer driver is not compatible with Windows
95. (→ Quick Start Guide)
z Before you start a print job on the computer, close any
software applications running in the background.
Another program running in the background could
break the flow of print data and temporarily stop the
printer or cause poor print quality.
Note
z For more details about how to use the printer driver,
please refer to Chapter 3 “Printing Methods for
Different Objectives”.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The Print window opens.

Make sure the name of the printer is
displayed in the Select Printer box, perform
the settings for the Page Range and
Number of Copies, then click the Print
button.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 40

Index

Printing

On the Main and Page Setup sheets, select the
Media Type, Media Source, Print Quality, Color
Settings, and Scaling settings for the print job.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The print job starts.

1- 41

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Important
z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the
output stacker.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z If the printer estimates that there is not enough ink
available to perform a very long print or print several
copies of the same document, it will issue the “Not
Enough Ink” alert on the operation panel. In this case,
replace the ink tank where the ink supply is low and
print again. However, if you reinstall and use an ink
tank that is nearly empty this could cause print quality
to deteriorate. Never try to reinstall an ink tank once
you see the mark in the ink level display.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing

Printing from a Macintosh

TOP
From the Apple menu, select Chooser.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

To print a job from a Macintosh software application, first
select the printer then use the Print command in the File
menu.

Important
z Before you start a print job on the computer, close any
software applications running in the background.
Another program running in the background could
break the flow of print data and temporarily stop the
printer or cause poor print quality.
Note
z For more details about how to use the printer driver,
please refer to the online Help of the printer driver.

Selecting the Printer
z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x
If you are using Mac OS 8.6 or Mac OS 9.x, select the
printer with the Chooser. This printer will not be displayed in the list if it is not switched on, or if the printer
cable is disconnected. Start the print job after you confirm that the printer is in working order.

Note
z You may not be able to share the printer with a USB
connection. In such a case, connect the printer directly
to the computer through its USB or IEEE1394 port
(option). If you want to share the printer, perform the
print job from a Windows computer.

1- 42

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Click the GARO Printer Driver icon in the
list on the left, then in the right list under
Destination select the name of the
connected printer.
Select the appropriate setting for the output
destination: USB for a USB connection, IEEE1394
for a FireWire connection, AppleTalk for a network
connection, or IP Print or IP Print (Auto).

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing

TOP
z For Mac OS X

Important
z If the printer is connected to a network, make sure that
Active is selected for AppleTalk.
z The network interface card used with this printer is not
set before shipping for use with AppleTalk. On the
printer operation panel, select Interface Setup >
AppleTalk > On. (→ P.5-30)
z For an IP print connection, register the IP address
under Registering IP Address and then select the
name of the printer under IP Print.

If you are using Mac OS X, user the printer setting utility
to select the printer from the Print Center. This printer will
not be displayed in the list if it is not switched on, or if the
printer cable is disconnected. Start the print job after you
confirm that the printer is in working order.
The example here describes Mac OS X Ver. 10.3. The
icon name and graphic may be different for other versions.

Close the Chooser window and click the OK
button in the message window.

This completes the selection of the printer.

Select Finder, then select Utility or
Applications from the Go menu.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Open the Utilities folder then open Printer
Setup Utility (Print Center).

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 43

Index

Printing

If the name of the printer is not in the Printer
List, click the Add icon.
If the printer is already displayed, go to Step 4.

In the connection menu select the
connection destination for the printer, select
the name of the printer from the list, then
click the Add button.
Select the appropriate setting for the connection
destination: USB for a USB connection, Canon
FireWire (GARO) for a IEEE1394 connection, or
Canon IP (GARO), Zeroconf or AppleTalk for a
network connection.

TOP
Important
z For the AppleTalk connection, confirm these settings:
System Preferences > Network > AppleTalk > Make
AppleTalk Active.
z The network interface card used with this printer is not
set before shipping for use with AppleTalk. On the
printer operation panel, select Interface Settings >
AppleTalk > On. (→ P.5-30)
Note
z This printer can be connected and operated with
Zeroconf of Mac OS X. If you are using Mac OS X Ver.
10.2.5 or later with a network connection using
Zeroconf functions selected on the Connection menu,
then you can select the name of this printer.
If you are using Mac OS 8.6, 9.x with the Canon
imagePROGRAF printer driver for Macintosh installed,
you can also use the Zeroconf function to connect the
printer.
z This printer can be connected and operated with
Canon IP (GARO). Select Canon IP (GARO) on the
Connection menu then enter the IP address and
printer name of this printer
z If the name of the printer is not displayed, check the
printer connection cable, and make sure that the
printer and network device are both switched on.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 44

Index

Printing

TOP

Operating the Printer

In the software application select Print from
the File menu.

If you are using Mac OS X, set the Copies&Pages
panel and the Main panel.

Click the Print button.
The print job starts.

Important
z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the
output stacker.

The Print window appears.

Check the Printer box and make sure that
the name of the printer is displayed. On the
Main panel select the settings for the Page,
Copies, Media Type, Media Source, Print
Quality, and other settings.

Note
z Before you start printing a long sheet or multiple
copies, you should always check the ink supply levels
of the ink tanks. To confirm the ink supply level of the
ink tanks, on the Main panel click the Printer
information button to display the levels. However, if
you reinstall an ink tank that is nearly out of ink and
use it this could cause the print quality to deteriorate.
Do not re-install the ink tank marked in the ink supply
level display.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 45

Index

Canceling a Print Job

TOP

Canceling a Print Job
Follow this procedure to cancel a print job.

Canceling a Print Job from Windows

1
2

In the Printers folder, double-click the icon
for the printer.

If the Data lamp is off and you cannot cancel
the print job, click the GARO Status Monitor
icon on the right end of the taskbar to open,
and then on the Printer Status sheet select
the print job that you want to cancel, then
press the Cancel Job button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Click the name of the job that you want to
cancel, click Printer in the menu bar and
select Cancel All Documents.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The print job is deleted.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

If the print in progress display on the printer
does not go off and online lamp is flashing,
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec.
Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

The print job in progress is canceled.

1- 46

Note
z You can also cancel a print job in progress, or a job
waiting to be printed, by selecting and canceling each
job on the on the Job sheet.

If the GARO Status Monitor is not installed,
hold down the Power button for 1 second or
more until the Shut Down.. is displayed,
then switch the printer power off and on.
All of the print data currently processing in the printer
is lost after the printer is switched off. Any print job
required must be restarted.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Canceling a Print Job

Canceling a Print Job from Macintosh
The procedure to cancel a print job is different, depending
on whether the job is printing in the background or the
foreground.

TOP
Select the print job to cancel, then click the
Printing Paused button.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Note
z On Mac OS X all jobs print in the background. Printing
cannot be performed in the foreground.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Canceling a Background Print Job
During background printing you can check the status of
print jobs and cancel them. Follow this procedure to cancel a print job.

z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x

In the GARO Printer Extra folder installed
on the hard disk, click the GARO
Printmonitor icon.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

The print queue (print processing) is suspended and
the Sending status display switches to Send. While
the print queue is paused, a red dot is displayed on
the right.
Once the printer enters the Ready to Send mode,
select the Job icon is marked with the
icon, and
then press the Printing Paused button to delete the
job. Continue from Step 4.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 47

Index

Canceling a Print Job

With the job selected for deletion, click the
Printing Paused button again.

TOP
Important
z After you have paused printing, you must select
Resume Printing. Printing cannot be done while the
print queue is paused (with the red dot displayed).

If the print in progress display on the printer
does not go off and online lamp is flashing,
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec.
Information Power
Data
Message

Select Resume Printing from the File menu.

Online

Offline
Menu

The print job is deleted.

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

1- 48

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The print job in progress is canceled.

If the Data lamp goes off and you cannot
cancel the print job, hold down the Power
button for at least 1 second, release it after
the Shut down.. message appears, then
after the printer switches off, switch it on
again.
All of the print data currently processing in the printer
is lost after the printer is switched off. Any print job
required must be restarted.

The printer re-enters print mode and is ready for
operation.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Canceling a Print Job

z Mac OS X
The example here describes Mac OS X Ver. 10.3. The
icon name and graphic may be different for other versions.

TOP
Select the name of the printer from the
Printer List, then select Show Jobs from
the Printers menu.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Select Finder, then select Utilities or
Applications from the Go menu.

The queue list for the printer is displayed.

4
Open the Utilities folder then open Printer
Setup Utility (Print Center).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Select the print job to cancel, then select
Delete Job from the Jobs menu.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The print job in progress is canceled.

Important
z A print job that has already been sent to the printer
cannot be canceled. If you want to cancel other
remaining jobs, cancel them with the GARO
Printmonitor.

1- 49

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Canceling a Print Job

TOP

z Select the name of the printer in the Printer Setup
Utility (Print Center), select the name of the printer,
click the Set icon, then open GARO Printmonitor for a
USB, FireWire, AppleTalk or Canon IP (GARO)
connection, connection, or open the Remote UI for a
Zeroconf connection.
Select the print job to delete, then click the Print
Cancel button to cancel the job.

Canceling a Foreground Print Job
If you are printing in the foreground with Mac OS 8.6/9.x,
a print processing dialog box remains open while the job
prints. Follow this procedure to cancel a print job.

When the print-in-progress dialog box opens,
press and hold down the Command key and
press the period (.) key.

Information Power
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

The print job is canceled.

If the print in progress display on the printer
does not go off and online lamp is flashing,
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec.

The print job in progress is canceled.

Information Power
Data
Message

If the Data lamp goes off and you cannot
cancel the print job, hold down the Power
button for at least 1 second to display Shut
Down..., then after the printer switches off,
switch it on again.
All of the print data currently processing in the printer
is lost after the printer is switched off. Any print job
required must be restarted.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

If the print in progress display on the printer
does not go off and online lamp is flashing,
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec.
Data

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Offline
Menu

The print job in progress is canceled.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 50

Index

Canceling a Print Job

TOP

If the Data lamp goes off and you cannot
cancel the print job, hold down the Power
button for at least 1 second to display Shut
Down.., then after the printer switches off,
switch it on again.
Information Power
Data
Message

Shut Down..
Please Wait..

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Online

Offline
Menu

All of the print data currently processing in the printer
is lost after the printer is switched off. Any print job
required must be restarted.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 51

Index

Options

TOP

Options
The following options are provided for this printer.

Stand
(Provided with the printer in the U.S.A.)
This stand is designed to support the W6400 Printer. The
output stacker designed for this printer is provided.
z Print Stand ST-23

Roll Holder Sets
This set contains the roll holder and stoppers. To make
proper use of rolls of different media types and widths, it
is convenient to have several stoppers and holders on
hand. Two types are available: 2-inch (provided on the
printer) and 3-inch.
z Roll Holder Set (For 2” Tubes) RH2-23

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

z Roll Holder Set (For 3” Tubes) RH3-23

Network Interface Board
The interface board that allows you add a LAN port.
z Canon Network Interface Board NB-15FB

IEEE1394 Expansion Board

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

This board provides the IEEE1394 (FireWire) interface.
z IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-04

Contents

1- 52

Index

Consumables

TOP

Consumables
The following consumables are available for this printer.
You should have consumables on hand before they run out.
Purchase consumables at the dealer where you purchased
the printer.

Print Media
The following types of media can be used with this
printer.

Proof:

z Newsprint for Proofing
z Proofing Paper

Generic:

z Plain paper
z Plain Paper (High Quality)
z Recycled Coated Paper
z Coated paper
z Heavyweight coated paper
z Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper
z Colored Coated Paper

z Type

1- 53

Photo:

z Glossy Photo Paper
z SemiGlos Photo Paper
z Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper
z Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo
Paper

Art:

z Premium Matte Paper
z Fine Art Photo
z Fine Art Heavyweight Photo
z Fine Art Textured
z Canvas SemiGlos
z Japanese Paper Washi

Signs:

z Synthetic Paper
z Adhesive Synthetic Paper
z Backlit Film
z Flame-Registrant cloth

CAD:

z CAD Plain Paper
z CAD Tracing Paper
z CAD Translucent Matte Film

z Roll Media Sizes

Width:

24” (609.6mm), ISO A1 (594.0mm), JIS
B2 (515.0mm), ISO A2 (420.0mm), 16”
(406.4mm), 14” (355.6mm), ISO A3
(297.0mm), 10” (254.0mm)

Roll diameter: Less than 150 mm (5.1 in.)
Media core
inside
diameter:

2”, 3”

Print surface:

Front side

z Cut Sheets

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Size Photo: 203.2 x 254.0 mm to ARCH D 609.6 x 914.4
mm

Contents
Index

Consumables

TOP
Maintenance Cartridge

Note
z For more details about media sizes, please refer to
Chapter 2 “Media You Can Use” (→ P.2-2).
z The quality of media varies with the manufacturer. To
purchase print media, contact the dealer where you
purchased the printer.

The maintenance cartridge (number listed below) is
replaceable.
z Maintenance cartridge MC-01

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Replaceable Ink Tanks

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

The following six types of replaceable ink tanks are used
in this printer.
z Ink Tanks for the W6400

Note
z For more details about how to replace the
maintenance cartridge, see Chapter 4 “Replacing the
Maintenance Cartridge” (→ P.4-16)
Yellow Ink
Magenta Ink
Photo Magenta Ink
Cyan Ink
Photo Cyan Ink
Black Ink
Matte Black Ink

BCI-1451Y
BCI-1431M
BCI-1431PM
BCI-1431C
BCI-1431PC
BCI-1431BK
BCI-1451MBK

Note
z For more details about how to replace the ink tanks,
see Chapter 4 “Replacing Ink Tanks” (→ P.4-2)
z Hereafter, “Photo Black Ink” is used to distinguish
“Black Ink BCI-1431 BK” from the matte black ink.

1- 54

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Replaceable Printhead
The product number of the printhead that can be used on
the printer is:
z Printhead BC-1350

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Note
z For more details about how to replace the printhead,
see Chapter 4 “Replacing the Printhead”
(→ P.4-23)

Contents
Index

Consumables

TOP

Cutter Blade
The product number of the cutter blade that can be used
on the printer is:
z Cutter Blade CT-02

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Note
z For more details about how to replace the cutter blade,
see Chapter 4 “Replacing the Cutter Blade” (→ P.4-29)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 55

Index

Specifications

TOP

Specifications

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

W6400
Print Features
Print Method
Print Modes
Max. Resolution
Interface

Serial Bubble Jet
Highest (Custom Settings) High, Standard, Draft
2400 x 1200 dpi

USB Interface
(USB 2.0 Standard)

1
(If the computer port, operating system, or USB cable does not support USB 2.0 High Speed
Mode, you will not be able to use High Speed Mode.) *1

Network Interface
(10base-T/100base-TX)
IEEE1394 Interface
(IEEE1394.a standard)

Interface Connector

Printhead
Nozzle gaps
Number of nozzles

1- 56

Option*2
Option*2
USB Interface: USB Standard Series B Receptacle
USB Interface Recommended Printer Cable:
Material: AWG28 or above
Type: Twisted-pair sealed cable (high speed mode compliant)
Length: max. 5.0 m (4.9 yd.)
Connector: USB Standard Series B Plug
IEEE1394 Interface (option): IEEE1394-1995 Standard 6-pin (without feed)
IEEE1394 Interface Recommended Printer Cable
Material: AWG28 (signal) AWG22 (power)
Type: Dual twisted pair shielded cable (100, 200, 400 Mbps mode compliant)
Length: max. 4.5 m (4.9 yd.)
Connector: IEEE1394-1995 Compliant 6-pin
Replaceable Printhead BC-1350
1200 dpi (600 dpi x 2 lines)
1280 nozzles x 6 colors

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Specifications

TOP
W6400

Replaceable Ink Tanks
Yellow Ink
Magenta Ink
Photo Magenta Ink
Cyan Ink
Photo Cyan Ink
Photo Black Ink*3
Matte Black Ink*3
Ink type
Ink tank capacity
Print Media
Media Width
Maximum length
Thickness

Type

Media Size and Print
Area*5
Compatible Media
Widths for Borderless
Output Stacker Capacity
Main Unit
Power source
Power Consumption
(Operation)

1- 57

Replaceable BCI-1451Y
Replaceable BCI-1431M
Replaceable BCI-1431PM
Replaceable BCI-1431C
Replaceable BCI-1431PC
Replaceable BCI-1431BK
Replaceable BCI-1451MBK
Pigment ink
130 ml (each color)
Range: 203.2 to 609.6 mm (min. to max.)
Roll: 18 m
Cut sheet: 1400 mm
70 ~ 800 µm
Plain Paper, CAD Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Recycled Coated Paper, Coated Paper,
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper,
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper, Synthetic
Paper, Adhesive Synthetic Paper, Backlit Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Proofing Paper 2, Newsprint for
Proofing*4 , Fine Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas SemiGlos, Japanese
Paper Washi, Colored Coated Paper, CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, Special 1 to 5
Normal Size: Printable Area Roll Paper: Top 5 mm, Bottom 5 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm
Cut Sheet: Top 5 mm, Bottom 23 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm
Guaranteed Print Area Roll Paper:, Cut Sheet: Top 20 mm, Bottom 23 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm
Borderless Size: Printable Area Roll Paper: Top 0 mm, Bottom 0 mm, Left/Right: 0 mm
Oversize*6 : Printable Area Roll Paper:, Cut Sheet: Top 0 mm, Bottom 0 mm, Left/Right: 0 mm
254.0mm, 355.6mm, 406.4mm, 515.0mm, 594.0mm, 609.6mm

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

1 sheet
AC100V ~ 240V 1.3A 50/60 Hz
Max. 160 W*7 (same as using Network Interface Board)
Sleep Mode: 100-115V: Less than 6W (same as using Network Interface Board)
220-240V: Less than 9W
Power off : Less than 1 W*8

Contents
Index

Specifications

W6400
Noise (Operation)
Approximately 50 dB (A) or less (less than 6.5 Bels)
Ideal operating environment 15 ~ 30 °C (59 ~ 86 °F), 10 ~ 80 % RH with no condensation
Operating Environment
5 ~ 35 °C (41~ 95 °F), 10~90 % RH with no condensation
Dimensions (w x d x h)
Printer only
1,200 mm x 569 mm x 484 mm (47.3 in x 22.4 in x 19.1 in)
Printer + Stand
1,200 mm x 752 mm x 1,097 mm (47.3 in x 29.6 in x 43.2 in)
Weight (including printhead, ink tanks)
Printer only
Approximately 40kg
Printer + Stand
Approximately 49kg
*1. The following environment is required to use the High Speed mode of USB 2.0.
• Computer: A computer that supports USB 2.0 High Speed mode.
• OS: Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, or Windows 2000, or MacOS X Ver. 10.3.3 or later.
• USB 2.0 Driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (you can obtain the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver from the Windows Update or
Service Pack).
• USB Cable: A USB cable certified for USB 2.0.
• Canon approved USB 2.0 interfaces (USB drivers confirmed for use with Microsoft operating systems):
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card USB2CONNECT3100
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card USB2CONNECT5100
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card USB2CONNECT2000L
• Intel 845G chip set
• SiS SiS740 chip set
If you have any questions about a chip set listed above, please contact the manufacturer.
*2. One card can be installed, either the network interface board or the IEEE1394 board.
*3. Either Photo Black Ink or Matte Black Ink can be installed.
*4. Use the RIP software application (sold separately) to print on Newsprint for Proofing.
*5. Cannot use the Borderless Size or Oversize items to print on some media types and sizes.
*6. With Oversize selected, load roll media larger than the selected Media Size: roll media 10 mm wider and 10 mm taller,
a cut sheet 10 mm wider and 20 mm taller.
*7. This may differ with some optional boards installed.
*8. The printer consumes a small amount of electrical power, even while it is switched off. Unplug the printer from its power source to cut off power consumption completely.
• These specifications are subject to change for improvements.
• The above specifications may vary for different operating environments.

1- 58

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Basic Environmental Performance

TOP

Basic Environmental Performance

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

W6400
Printer
Power Consumption (Operation)
Energy Save mode (Sleep Mode)
Power switch off (with power plug
connected)
Power Source Efficiency
Printer Weight
Dimensions (w x d x h)
Recycling
Product Safety
Content of Harmful Materials
Noise (Operation)
External Cover Material
Content of Heavy Metals (Pb, Hg,
Cr (VI), Cd)
Recycling
Applicable Standards

100-115V: Less than 6W (same as using Network Interface Board)
220-240V: Less than 9W
Less than 1 W
Approximately 40.0kg
1,200mm x 569mm x 484mm (47.3 in x 22.4 in x 19.1 in)
Exterior covers are technically certified as fully recyclable.
Total Configuration: No special unburnable bromide materials (PBB, PBDE) used.
External Cover Plastic: No heavy metals (Pb, Hg, Cr (VI), Cd) or Halogen
unburnable materials used.
Approximately 50 dB (A) or less (less than 6.5 Bels)
Not Used (Packing Material)
All containers, packing material recyclable (from April, 2004)
International Energy Star Program, VCCI (class B)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

1- 59

Index

TOP

Chapter 2 Using a Variety of Media
Click on the checkbox to print the section contents.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Media You Can Use ...................................................................................2-2
The Suitable Black Ink for Media ........................................................................... 2-2
Paper Type ............................................................................................................ 2-4
Media Size ........................................................................................................... 2-18
Original data the same as the media ................................................................... 2-20
Handling Paper and Other Print Media ................................................................ 2-25

Printing with Rolls .....................................................................................2-26
Loading Roll Media .............................................................................................. 2-26
Removing a Roll .................................................................................................. 2-33

Printing with Cut Sheets ...........................................................................2-35
Loading Cut Sheets ............................................................................................. 2-35
Removing a Cut Sheet ........................................................................................ 2-39

Adjusting the Height of the Printhead .......................................................2-40
Adjusting Printhead Height .................................................................................. 2-40
Aligning the Printhead ......................................................................................... 2-42
Re-adjusting Printhead Height ............................................................................. 2-42

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

2- 1

How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages

Start Print → Before clicking the Start Print button

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Media You Can Use
A variety of media types and sizes can be used with this
printer. The following media can be used with this printer.

Important
z Some media require more time for the ink to dry after
printing. After printing please allow the ink to dry
sufficiently before you handle it.
z With some print media, the hue of some colors may
change slightly when the ink on the surface of the
media has dried completely.
Note
z For details about how to handle and store print media,
please refer to the instructions provided with the
packet.

The Suitable Black Ink for Media
Either one of two types of black ink can be used with this
printer, Photo Black Ink or Matte Black Ink. The
characteristics of these two types of ink are different and
best suited for different types of media. Carefully select the
type of black ink you want to use, based on the type of
media you use and how often you use it.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Caution
z If you print with the black ink that is not suited to the
type of media, it may result in unsatisfactory printing
and foul the media or printer with ink.

Important
z To switch the type of black ink, execute Change Bk
Ink Type on the printer operation panel and follow the
instructions displayed. You can switch between the
types of black ink, but please remember that every
time you switch the black ink tanks the printer
consumes about 45 ml of black ink and about 15 ml of
the colored inks in total. (→ P.4-47)

Black Ink Types and Characteristics
z Photo Black Ink (BIC-1431 Bk)
This ink is best for media like glossy and proof media
with high-density black on a glossy surface. This ink
can be used to print on most types of media including
glossy paper.
z Matte Black Ink (BIC-1451 MBk)
This ink is best for black density on matte or fine art
media, and even plain paper. Do not use matte black
ink on media with a glossy surface.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

2- 2

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Black Ink Characteristics
Print
Application

Photo

Proof

Generic

Art

Signs

CAD

Media Type
Glossy Photo Paper
SemiGlos Photo Paper
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper
Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper
Proofing Paper
Newsprint for Proofing
Plain Paper
Plain Paper (High Quality)
Recycled Coated Paper
Coated Paper
Heavyweight Coated Paper
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper
Colored Coated Paper
Premium Matte Paper
Fine Art Photo
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo
Fine Art Textured
Canvas SemiGlos
Japanese Paper Washi
Synthetic Paper
Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Backlit Film
Flame-Resistant Cloth
CAD Plain Paper
CAD Tracing Paper
CAD Translucent Matte Film

:Recommended ink,

2- 3

:Usable ink,

Usable Ink Types
Photo
Matte
Black Ink Black Ink

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

:Unusable

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Paper Type
This section describes the types of media that you can use
with this printer. To obtain the most recent information about
usable media, contact the dealer where you purchased the
printer or Canon service center.
The following items are described in the tables.

Note
z For information about media, be sure to read the
instructions provided with the media packet and
contact the manufacturer of each media.

Media Type
Characteristics

Describes the characteristics of each
media.

Print
Application

Describes print jobs best suited for media.
Indoors

Display
Outdoors

Photo Black
Black Ink
Suitability
Matte Black

2- 4

Describes the Media Type
setting in the printer driver.
Roll Paper Width commercially available
Width
media
: Borderless Printing
Possible
: Left and Right 2-Edge
Printer Driver Borderless Borderless Printing
Settings
: Borderless Printing Not
Possible
: Auto Cut Possible
*Borderless printing possible
to all 4 edges.
Auto Cut
: Auto Cut Not Possible
*Borderless printing possible,
only left to right edge.
Name of the media type to
Operation
Media Type appear on the operation
Panel Settings
panel display
L : Low position
Printhead
M : Center position (Standard)
Optimum
H : High position
Height
* Press the Information button to display
the appropriate height of the print head.
Special notes and precautions are
Comments
described here.
Media Type

: Indoors OK
: Indoors NG
: Outdoors OK
: Outdoors NG
* Perform laminate
processing before displaying
outdoors.
: Recommended
: Possible
: Not possible
: Recommended
: Possible
: Not possible

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Plain paper

CAD Plain Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Superior yet economical ink-jet paper. Use
for color prints in schools for research
Characteristics presentation, or monochrome prints for
ceremonies, rallies, etc. It is low cost, so
you can use it for test prints.
Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Print
Application

Generic
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Characteristics Superior yet economical ink-jet paper.

Plain paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Comments

2- 5

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

CAD Plain Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Plain Paper

M
You can use standard copy machine cut
sheets (64~105 g/m2) in place of plain
paper for the printer.

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

CAD

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

CAD Plain Paper

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Comments

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Plain Paper (High Quality)

Recycled Coated Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Characteristics

High white content makes this plain paper
comparatively thick.

Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability
Plain Paper
(High Quality)

Roll Paper Width

24”

Printer Driver
Settings

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Recycled Coated
Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Plain Paper HQ

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Generic

Media Type

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Thin coated paper Ideal for line drawings,
maps, presentation materials.

Print
Application

Generic

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Characteristics

Recycled Coated

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Comments

2- 6

Comments

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Coated Paper

Heavyweight Coated Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Characteristics

Thin coated paper Ideal for line drawings,
maps, presentation materials.

Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Print
Application

Generic
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Coated paper with a thick paper base. Use
to print full-color images mainly consist of
Characteristics graphic images. Ideal for store POP,
presentation materials, many other
applications.

Coated Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Printer Driver
Settings

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Heavyweight Coated
Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”, A1, B2

Coated Paper

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Generic

Media Type

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

HW Coated

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Comments

2- 7

Comments

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Premium Matte Paper

Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

High-quality ultraheavyweight matte coated
paper, the thickest of all Canon's genuine
Matte Papers, which supports the widest
range of color reproduction, This paper offers
Characteristics
a soft texture free of reflective glare for a
tranquil feel. Suitable for wide-ranging
applications from Photo/Fine Art to Materials
for Display such as High-Quality Poster/POP.

A heavy coating is added to this thick
Characteristics paper, making it ideal for handling as art
material and a variety of textures.

Print
Application

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Art
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability
Premium Matte
Paper

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Roll Paper Width

24”

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Extra Heavyweight
Coated Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Premium Matte

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

The standard cutter cannot be used to
perform automatic cutting. After printing,
cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
The borderless printing is performed on the
left and right edges.

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

2- 8

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Generic

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Ex HW Coated

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Comments

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Glossy Photo Paper

SemiGlos Photo Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

A glossy photo paper, like that used to
develop silver-halide photos. Ideal when
you want high-quality finish for
Characteristics
photographs. Processed with resin coat
processing to prevent rippling and ensure
a flat finish.
Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Printer Driver
Settings

Subdues light reflected from its white
surface to create a softer effect in its finish.
Characteristics The surface reflects little bright light,
making it ideal for show panels,
presentation materials, POPs, etc.
Print
Application

Photo
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type

Glossy Photo Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”, 14”, 10”, A1, B2

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

SemiGlos Photo
Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”, 14”, 10”, A1, B2

Glossy Photo

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

2- 9

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Photo

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

Sem-Gl Photo

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper
A glossy photo paper, like that used to
develop silver-halide photos. Processed
with resin coat processing to prevent
Characteristics
rippling and ensure a flat finish. This thick
paper is similar to the quality of silver
halide photographs.
Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Printer Driver
Settings

Subdues light reflected from its white
surface to create a softer effect in its finish.
The surface reflects little bright light,
Characteristics making it ideal for show panels,
presentation materials, POPs, etc. This
thick paper is similar to the quality of silver
halide photographs.
Print
Application

Photo
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black
Media Type

Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper

Display
Black Ink
Suitability
Heavyweight Glossy
Photo Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Printer Driver
Settings

Heavyweight
SemiGlos Photo
Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

HW Glossy Photo

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Media Type

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

2- 10

Photo

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

HW SemiGl Photo

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Synthetic Paper

Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

A superior synthetic paper of
polypropylene film for display posters. Can
Characteristics
be used to display outdoors after
laminating.

Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Signs
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Print
Application

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

An economical superior synthetic paper of
polypropylene film for display posters. Can
Characteristics
be used to display outdoors after
laminating.

Synthetic Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Adhesive Synthetic
Paper

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Roll Paper Width

24”

Syn. Paper

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

2- 11

Signs

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

Adh. Syn. Paper

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Backlit Film

Flame-Resistant Cloth
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Printing is performed on the glossy, semitransparent surface of this film, then a
projector light mounted behind the film
Characteristics makes the print surface more beautiful.
Use indoors, outdoors as an electrical
decoration or beautiful display
applications.

This is indoor cloth that has superior
durability and is flame resistant. Suitable
Characteristics
for horizontal banners, tapestries, to create
a good mood, or atmosphere.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Print
Application

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Signs
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Backlit Film

Roll Paper Width

24”

2- 12

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Flame-Resistant
Cloth

Printer Driver
Settings

Roll Paper Width

24”

Backlit Film

M
After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

Comments

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black
Media Type

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Signs

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

Flame-Res.Cloth

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

The standard cutter cannot be used to
perform automatic cutting. After printing,
cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
The borderless printing is performed on the
left and right edges.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Proofing Paper

Newsprint for Proofing
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Can cover the color reproduction of offset
printing for proofreading, thus achieving
Characteristics color tones close to those of the final print.
Ideal for printers who need color output for
proofing.
Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Print
Application

Proof
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Best for Newsprint for Proofing. Texture
almost the same as newsprint, and
Characteristics available in a wide variety of colors. Three
main types of Newsprint Proof that are
used in Japan are provided.

Proofing Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Comments

2- 13

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Newsprint for
Proofing 1~3

Roll Paper Width

Proofing Paper

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Proof

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

News Proof 1
News Proof 2
News Proof 3

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Optional RIP software sold separately is
required.

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Fine Art Photo

Fine Art Heavyweight Photo
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

From portraits and landscapes to digital
Characteristics art, this media produces exceedingly high,
composed quality.

Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Print
Application

Art
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

From portraits and landscapes to digital
Characteristics art, this media produces exceedingly high,
composed quality.

Fine Art Photo

Roll Paper Width

24”

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Fine Art
Heavyweight Photo

Roll Paper Width

24”

Fine Art Photo

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

The standard cutter cannot be used to
perform automatic cutting. After printing,
cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
The borderless printing is performed on the
left and right edges.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

2- 14

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Art

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

FneArt HW Photo

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

The standard cutter cannot be used to
perform automatic cutting. After printing,
cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
The borderless printing is performed on the
left and right edges.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Fine Art Textured

Canvas SemiGlos
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

For landscapes, watercolors, etc. this
Characteristics media reproduces exceedingly high,
composed quality.

Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Art
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Print
Application

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Using polyester cloth as its base, this
media creates a bold, unique feeling.
Characteristics
Ideal for output of artworks such as digital
paintings, copies of oil paintings, etc.

Fine Art Textured

Roll Paper Width

24”

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Canvas SemiGlos

Roll Paper Width

24”

FineArt Txtr

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

The standard cutter cannot be used to
perform automatic cutting. After printing,
cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
The borderless printing is performed on the
left and right edges.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

2- 15

Art

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

Canvas Semi-Gl

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Japanese Paper Washi

Colored Coated Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Ink jet printing and texture of traditional
Japanese washi paper combine well.
This media is ideal for any type of artwork
Characteristics
for a warm, calm presentation, including
watercolors, ink drawings, Japanese
paintings, Japanese style POPs, etc.
Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Print
Application

Art
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability
Japanese Paper
Washi

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Ideal for price POPs at drugstores and
Characteristics other retail outlets. Covered on both sides
with high-impact yellow.

Roll Paper Width

24”

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Colored Coated
Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”

JPN Paper Washi

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Generic

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Colored Coated

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Comments

2- 16

Comments

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

CAD Tracing Paper

CAD Translucent Matte Film
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Tracing paper that can be used for color
Characteristics printing, and ideal for CAD plans and
drawings.

Print
Application
Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Print
Application

CAD
Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Display
Black Ink
Suitability

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

A translucent film for CAD designs (line
Characteristics drawings). Superior, stable dimensions, for
master plans and other high-quality output.

CAD Tracing Paper

Roll Paper Width

24”, A1

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Comments

2- 17

Indoors
Outdoors
Photo Black
Matte Black

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

CAD Translucent
Matte Film

Roll Paper Width

CAD Trace Paper

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Borderless Printing
Auto Cut

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings
Printhead
Optimum
Height

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

CAD

Media Type
Printer Driver
Settings

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Operation
Media Type
Panel Settings

CAD Matte Film

Printhead
Optimum
Height

Comments

After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Media Size
The table below lists the media sizes and feeding methods that can be used with this printer.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Roll Media
This table lists roll media with maximum diameters of 150 mm (5.1 in.), media core inside diameter of 2 or 3 inches.
Width
Non-category 24”
609.6 mm (24 in.)
ISO A1
594.0 mm (24 in.)
JIS B2
515.0 mm (20.28 in.)
ISO A2
16.54-in. Roll (420.0 mm)
Non-category 16”
406.4 mm (16 in.)
Non-category 14”
355.6 mm (14 in.)
ISO A3
297.0 mm (11.69 in.)
Non-category 10”
254.0 mm (10 in.)

Size Name in Printer Driver*1

BorderlessPrinting*2

ARCH D, ARCH C, 20” x 24”
ISO A1, ISO A2
JIS B2, JIS B3
ISO A2, ISO A3

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

ANSI Legal

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

ISO A3, ISO A4

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

US Photo

10” x 15”, 10” x 12”, 8” x 10”

*1. Borderless printing is possible with Custom Settings using the widths of the media
above.
*2. Media Types that can be used for borderless printing are: Heavy Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper, SemiGlos Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper, Fine Art Photo, Fine Art
Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Special 1 to 5. However, Premium Matte Paper, Flame-Resistant Cloth and Fine Art cannot be cut automatically. After printing, cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)

2- 18

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Cut Sheet

Size (Width)

Cut sheets up to 606.9 mm wide (listed below) can be
used.
Size (Width)

Dimensions

ISO A1

594.0 x 841.0 m (23.39 x 33.11 in.)

ISO A2

420.0 x 594.0 mm (16.54 x 23.39 in.)

ISO A3+

329.0 x 483.0 mm (12.95 x 19.02 in.)

ISO A3

297.0 x 420.0 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in.)

ISO A4

210.0 x 297.0 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in.)

ISO B2

500.0 x 707.0 mm (19.69 x 27.83 in.)

ISO B3

353.0 x 500.0 mm (13.90 x 19.69 in.)

ISO B4

250.0 x 353.0 mm (9.84 x 13.90 in.)

JIS B2

515.0 x 728.0 mm (20.28 x 28.66 in.)

JIS B3

364.0 x 515.0 mm (14.33 x 20.28 in.)

JIS B4

257.0 x 364.0 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in.)

ANSI D

558.8 x 863.6 mm (22 x 34 in.)

ANSI C

431.8 x 558.8 mm (17 x 22 in.)

ANSI B

279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17 in.)

Dimensions

ARCH B

304.8 x 457.2 mm (12 x 18 in.)

ARCH A

228.6 x 304.8 mm (9 x 12 in.)

DIN C2

458.0 x 648.0 mm (18.03 x 25.51 in.)

DIN C3

324.0 x 458.0 mm (12.76 x 18.03 in.)

DIN C4

229.0 x 324.0 mm (9.02 x 12.76 in.)

Poster
20” x 30”

508.0 x 762.0 mm (20 x 30 in.)

20” x 24”

508.0 x 609.6 mm (20 x 24 in.)

18” x 22”

457.2 x 558.8 mm (18 x 22 in.)

14” x 17”

355.6 x 431.8 mm (14 x 17 in.)

10” x 15”

254.0 x 381.0 mm (10 x 15 in.)

10” x 12”

254.0 x 304.8 mm (10 x 12 in.)

8” x 10”

203.2 x 254.0 mm (8 x 10 in.)

US Photo

406.4 x 508.0 mm (16 x 20 in.)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

ANSI B Super 330.2 x 482.6 mm (13 x 19 in.)

2- 19

ANSI Letter

215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)

ANSI Legal

215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

ARCH D

609.6 x 914.4 mm (24 x 36 in.)

ARCH C

457.2 x 609.6 mm (18 x 24 in.)

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP
Printing possible inside the area 5 mm in
from the top, bottom, left and right margins.

Original data the same as the media
In addition to the normal media sizes, there are borderless
sizes and oversizes. The size of the printable areas, actual
settings, and actual printing areas are different for these
sizes. Select a size that matches your needs.

5 mm
Media Size
Printable Area

Note
z To display Oversize, click the Size Options button on
the Page Setup sheet, then under Display Series
select Oversize.

Standard sizes from 24”, ISO A1, JIS B2,
ISO A2, 16”, 14”, 10”, and Custom Sizes of
the above widths.

Printable
Media Types

All media types

5 mm

Print Area

Same size as the Media Size or wide roll
paper.

Media to Load

z Roll Media
Printable
Paper Size

5 mm

Normal Size:
Achieves a printout that is the same size as the media.
This can be used with all media sizes and media types.
The printout has top, bottom, left, and right margins, and
images with margins can be trimmed.

Media Size
Roll Media
Size to
Load

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Data created the same size as Media Size.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Print Data and
Results

Original data the
same as the media

2- 20

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Print Results

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

z Cut Sheets
Printable
Media Size

ARCH D to 8 x 10 Standard Sizes, and
203.2 x 203.2 mm to 609.6 x 1400 mm
Custom Sizes

Printable Type All media types
Printing possible inside the area 5 mm in from the top, left and
right area margins, and 23 mm in from the bottom margin.

5 mm
Media Size
Printable Area

5 mm

23 mm

5 mm

Print Area

Data created the same size as cut sheet.

Media Size
Media to Load

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Cut Sheet
Size to
Load

Data created the same size as Media Size.

Print Data and
Results

2- 21

Important
z The print quality or the precision of line feed may
deteriorate at the top margin of the media, or the
surface of the print may appear scratchy. Also, ink may
stick to the top and bottom edges. If the printhead is
scratching the surface of the media, raise the
printhead to a higher position. (→ P.2-40)
z When loading cut sheets that are longer than 914 mm
(36”), the trailing edge of the sheet will touch the floor
and may become dirty. Before such a long cut sheet,
before you start the print job remove the roll holder and
spread a cloth or some paper on the floor, or when the
cut sheet starts to feed tuck the trailing edge into the
output stacker. (→ P.2-39)

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Original data the
same as the media

Print Results

Index

Media You Can Use

Borderless Printing
With borderless printing sizes, printing is done from edge
to edge without leaving any margins. Borderless printing
is limited to roll media, and there are limitations on the
roll width and type of media that can be used. Also, the
range of images that can be printed is different for some
printing methods. For more details about borderless
printing, please refer to Chapter 3 “Printing Photos and
Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing)”
(→ P.3-13) (→ P.3-77).

TOP
z Roll Media
24”, ISO A1, JIS B2,16”,14”, 10” Standard
Printable
Sizes and Custom Sizes of the same
Paper Size
width.
Heavy Coated Paper, Extra Heavyweight
Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper,
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Heavyweight
Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight
Printable Type
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Fine Art Photo,
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art
Textured, Flame Resistant Cloth, Special 1
to 5
Allowed Printing Area of Media Size

0 mm
Media Size
Printable Area

0 mm

Print Area

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Data created the same width as roll paper.

Media Size
Media to Load

2- 22

Roll Media
Size to
Load

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Data created the same size as Media Size.

Scale to fit
the Page
Size
(Example)

With Oversize you can print over the entire surface of the
media. This is possible with all media types. When you
use Oversize to print, you must load media that is larger
than the Media Size. Also, the margins are attached
beyond the media size.

Printed slightly
enlarged
automatically
Original data the
same as the media

Print Results

Print Data and Results

Create data of any size.
Scale to fit
Roll Paper
Width
(Example)

Oversize

Note
z To display Oversize click the Size Options button on
the Page Setup sheet, then under Display Series
select Oversize.

z Roll Media
Printable
Paper Size

Enlarge/Reduce
to Fit Roll Paper
Width
Original data
of desired size

Printable Type All media types
Allowed printing surface area of media size

Print Results

Create data larger by 3 mm at the top,
bottom, left, and right margins.

0 mm
Media Size
Printable Area

Print
Image with
Actual Size
(Example)

2- 23

0 mm

Print
actual size
Original data 3 mm larger
than the media size at the
top, bottom, left, right margins.

ISO A1 to Photo 8 x 10 Standard Sizes
Width 100.0 to 599.6 mm Custom Size

Print Results

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

0 mm

Print Area

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Roll Media more than 10 mm wider than
the media size.

Media Size
Media to Load

Roll Media
Size to
Load

z Cut Sheets
Printable
Paper Size

Standard ISO A1 to Photo sizes, and 203.2
x 203.2 mm to 599.6 x 1400 mm Custom
Sizes

Printable
Media Types

All media types
Allowed printing surface area of media size

0 mm
Media Size

Data created the same size as media size.

Print Data and
Results

Printable Area

0 mm

0 mm
Actual
size full
coverage
print
Original data the
same as the media

0 mm

Print Area

Cut sheets more than 10 mm wider and 29
mm more than longer than the media size.

Media Size

Print Results

Media to Load

Important
z The end edge of the roll media can disrupt a print job
as it comes off the roll. Try to avoid printing in the area
near the end edge of a roll.

Size of
loaded
cut sheet

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

2- 24

Index

Media You Can Use

TOP

Data created the same size as media size.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Print Data and
Results

Actual
size full
coverage
print
Original data the
same as the media

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Print Results

Important
z You cannot use ARCH D and other sizes wider than
599.6 mm to print for Oversize.

Handling Paper and Other Print Media
For details about how to handle and store print media,
please refer to the instructions provided with the media.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

2- 25

Index

Printing with Rolls

TOP

Printing with Rolls
Loading Roll Media
This is the general procedure for loading roll media.
After printing, remove the completed printout and any
media loaded on the platen. (→ P.2-33, P.2-39)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Selecting the Paper Source
When printing on roll media, select roll media as the
paper source on the operation panel.

On the operation panel, select the roll media source.
(→ P.2-26)

Press and hold the Paper Source button for
1 second or more to light the Roll Media
lamp.
Pressing the Paper Source button alternates the
selection between Roll Media and Cut Sheet.

Load the roll media in the roll holder slot. (→ P.2-27)
Load the roll media on the platen. (→ P.2-30)

Information Power

On the printer operation panel, select the media type.
(→ P.2-30)

Data
Message

Offline

Feed Papre

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Adjust the amount of media feed. (→ P.4-42)
Offline
Menu

Start the print job from the computer. (→ P.1-40)

Important
z Make sure that the printer is switched on before you
load roll media. If the loaded media does not match the
media type, this can affect the quality of printing.

When a cut sheet is loaded, the printer will display
Remove CutSheet?.
When another roll media is loaded, hold down the
Stop button for more than 1 sec., to display Remove
RllMedia?.

If either a cut sheet or roll media is loaded in
the printer, press the OK button.
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Remove either the cut sheet or the roll media.
(→ P.2-33, P.2-39)

2- 26

Index

Printing with Rolls

Loading the Roll Media

Follow this procedure to set a roll in the roll holder. First,
if there is a cut sheet or an ejected printed sheet on the
platen, remove it.

TOP
If there is roll media remaining in the printer,
push the release lever to the rear to open,
rotate the roll holder toward the rear to take
up the remaining paper, then remove the roll.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Important
z When you are printing a banner or other long printout,
the printed media may touch the floor and become
dirty. Before starting the print job, cover the floor with a
clean cloth or some paper.
Note
z Since the platen may be fouled with ink, clean inside
the upper cover before you switch to printing on a
large size. (→ P.4-11)
z For more details about media that can be set in the roll
holder, please refer to “Media You Can Use” (→ P.2-2).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Lower the holder stopper release lever (a) to
release the lock, remove the holder stopper,
then remove the roll from the holder.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Important
z Store unused roll media in its original package. Store
the package in a cool, dry location that is not exposed
to direct sunlight.

2- 27

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing with Rolls

With the edge of the roll media up and
pointing in, insert the shaft of the roll holder
into the roll from the left side until it is all the
way in and stops.

TOP
Attach the holder stopper to the right side of
the roll holder and insert it until it contacts the
core of the roll, then push the holder stopper
lever (a) over toward the shaft to lock it.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Caution
z Lay the roll holder horizontally onto a table or desk.
Roll media are heavy and can cause personal injury if
they drop.

Important
z If the edge of the roll paper is not straight, take up the
roll paper until the edge is straight then set it. This
could cause poor paper feed.

z Press the roll holder onto the end of the roll until it is
completely inserted. Make sure there is no gap (a gap
can cause poor feeding).

2- 28

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The roll media is locked in place by the roll holder.

Important
z If the leading edge of the roll media is not straight, or if
it is marked by dirt or tape, this could cause poor
feeding and lead to poor print quality. In such a case,
cut the leading edge of the roll media in a straight line
before setting the roll holder in the printer.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing with Rolls

TOP

Hold the ends of the roll media with the roll facing
the printer (as shown in the illustration), then align
and set the ends of the roll holder (b) into the
guide grooves (c) of the roll holder slots.
If the roll paper is slack and its edge is not straight,
take up the roll slack until the edges are straight then
set it.

Push the release lever toward the rear to
open it, then pull out the roll media evenly
and insert it into the feed slot (d) and feed it
in until you hear the suction sound of the
vacuum.

Important
z When you pull out the sheet, be careful to avoid
touching the printing surface of the paper. Touching
the print surface could cause poor print quality.
z If you see the media is wrinkled or curled, remove the
wrinkles or curls before loading the media.
z If media does not feed easily through the feed slot (d)
insert the edge skewed to the left or right corner, then
and then feed it in until it is parallel.
Note
z The strength of the vacuum suction can be adjusted
while the release lever is open. If the media is difficult
to load, on the printer operation panel press [ ]
(stronger) or [ ] (weaker) to adjust the strength of the
suction.

Open the upper cover.

2- 29

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

As soon as you insert the edge as far as the top of
the platen, you will hear the printer start the vacuum
automatically.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.

Contents
Index

Printing with Rolls

While gently pulling out the center of the
leading edge (e) of the roll media, align the
right edge of the media so it is parallel to
guideline (f), then pull the release lever to the
front to close it.

Important
z Do not pull strongly the roll media when you align it
with the guideline. The roll media may not feed out
straight in some cases.

Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Media Type is displayed.

2- 30

TOP
Press [ ] or [ ] to select the loaded media
type, then press OK.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Media Type
HW Coated

The (=) mark to the left of a setting indicates that roll
media type is currently selected, then the
preparation for the select media begins.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

The table below lists the settings for the media
types. Only the types of media that can be used with
the black ink tank installed in the printer are
displayed.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Media Name
Plain Paper
CAD Plain Paper
Plain Paper (High Quality)
Recycled Coated Paper
Coated Paper
Heavyweight Coated Paper
Premium Matte Paper
Extra Heavyweight Coated
Paper
Glossy Photo Paper
SemiGlos Photo Paper
Heavyweight Glossy Photo
Paper
Heavyweight SemiGlos
Photo Paper
Synthetic Paper
Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Backlit Film
Flame-Registrant cloth

Media Type Setting
Plain Paper
CAD Plain Paper
Plain Paper HQ
Recycled Coated
Coated Paper
HW Coated
Premium Matte

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Ex HW Coated
Glossy Photo
Semi-Gl Photo
HW Glossy Photo

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

HW SemiGl Photo
Syn. Paper
Adh. Syn. Paper
Backlit Film
Flame-Res.Cloth

Contents
Index

Printing with Rolls

Media Name
Proofing Paper
Newsprint for Proofing
Fine Art Photo
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo
Fine Art Textured
Canvas SemiGlos
Japanese Paper Washi
Colored Coated Paper
CAD Tracing Paper
CAD Translucent Matte Film
Special 1~5

TOP
Media Type Setting
Proofing Paper 2
News Proof/1/2/3
FineArt Photo
FneArt HW Photo
FineArt Txtr
Canvas Semi-Gl
JPN Paper Washi
Colored Coated
CAD Trace Paper
CAD Matte Film
Special 1~5

Important
z Make sure that you have selected the correct setting
for the media type. If you have selected an incorrect
setting for the media type, do the procedure in
“Selecting the Media Type” (→ P.2-32).
z As soon as each sheet is printed, remove it from the
output stacker.
Note
z If a message appears in the display after loading roll
paper, the operation panel lamp flashes.
z Before shipping a printer, the Media Type is set for
Plain Paper. Or, when the release lever is opened and
closed, the media type setting is reset automatically to
Plain Paper.
z The media size is detected automatically, therefore no
setting for the size is required.

2- 31

z In order to align the leading edge correctly when the
roll media is replaced with a new one, the media is fed
and then cut the correct amount for the type of media.
Also, if a barcode is printed on the media, the portion
where the barcode is will be cut off after the barcode is
read.

If a new roll without barcodes is loaded in the
printer while the paper remains function is
enabled, press [ ] or [ ] to select the
length of roll then press the OK button.
If you have set a roll with media remaining barcodes
printed, the amount of media remaining is detected
automatically so you do not have to select it.
Media Length
30.00 m

After a few seconds, Online appears on the display
and the printer is ready to print.

If the output assist guides are not extended,
pull it out.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Important
z The output assists guides should always be extended
for printing. If they are not extended, this could lead to
poor print quality.

Contents
Index

Printing with Rolls

TOP

Selecting the Media Type
When you are using the printer with media loaded, you
must use the printer operation panel to select the type of
media loaded. If the type of print media is not suitable,
you may not be able to achieve the desired results. Follow the procedure below if the media type selection does
not match the type of media loaded in the printer.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Online

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Media Type,
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Media Type

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select the name of the
media type then press OK.
Media Type
HW Coated

An equals sign (=) displays on the left to indicate the
media type is set.

2- 32

Important
z In order to achieve the best printing results with this
printer, the amount of feed is fine adjusted for each
type of media. For this reason, the image size,
margins, and other settings change for each media
type.
z When you select another media type, you should also
adjust the feed amount (→ P.4-42) and “Adjusting the
Height of the Printhead” (→ P.2-40).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing with Rolls

TOP
For the media when the Standard Cutter
operation is set to Enable:

Removing a Roll
Follow the procedure below to remove a loaded roll or when
the media cannot be cut automatically. Or, if you are
printing on a media with the Eject Cut item of Media
Configuration Tool (→ P.3-58) (→ P.3-127) set to Required,
perform the same procedure when you see Cut by Stop
Key after printing finishes.

Important
z When the roll media remaining detection function is
on, you must follow a strict procedure to remove a roll.
If you open the release lever and remove the roll
before the media remaining bar code prints, the printer
will lose its ability to monitor the amount of media
remaining on the roll.
z After removing a roll from the printer, store it in its
original vinyl bag. When you print on roll media that
has not been properly stored, the surface of the media
may chafe or the print quality may be poor.

Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second.
Online
Bk

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Plain Paper

XXｍ

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

2. The roll is ejected at the back of the printer.

Important
z Even if the roll paper remains function is on, if you
open the release lever without pressing the Stop/Eject
button the barcode does not print. In such a case, the
roll remains function cannot be done with that roll.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Online

Press the OK button.
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop

2- 33

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

1. If the paper remains function is switched on for
the roll media, a barcode is printed on the
leading edge of the roll.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Contents
Index

Printing with Rolls

TOP

If the printer cannot perform automatic cutting with
the media:

For Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper,
Heavyweight SemiGlossy Photo Paper, Backlit
Film, CAD Translucent Matte Film:

1. Press the Online button to set the printer
offline.

The printer stops after printing to protect the
printing surface. To prevent the printouts from
falling into the output stacker, support the printout
with your hand and press the Stop/Eject button to
perform the cut.

2. Press the [ ] button (not longer than 0.8 sec)
to feed the media 330 mm.
3. Cut along the cutting-line with a pair of scissors.
4. Hold down the [ ] button on the printer
operation panel for more than 1 sec. until you
see Feed Limit.. on the display. The roll media
reverse feeds 300 mm and stops automatically.
5. Press the Online button to set the printer
offline.

Important
z If the printer receives new print data before this
operation is performed, printing will continue.
z Cut exactly along the cut-line. The printer may not be
able to perform continuous printing if you cut at a
position more than 30 mm away from the cut-line.

Important
z If the ink drying time has been set, you will not be able
to perform cutting with the Stop/Eject button until the
prescribed drying time has elapsed.

Rotate the roll holder backward to take up
excess media and remove it.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

2- 34

Index

Printing with Cut Sheets

TOP

Printing with Cut Sheets
Loading Cut Sheets
To print on the cut sheet, follow the procedure below.
If there is a cut sheet in the printer, remove it.
(→ P.2-33, P.2-39)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Selecting the Paper Source
When printing on the cut sheet, with the operation panel
select cut sheet as the media source.

On the printer operation panel, select cut sheet as the
paper feed source. (→ P.2-35)

Press and hold the Paper Source button for
1 second or more to light the Cut Sheet
lamp.
Pressing Paper Source alternates the selection
between Roll Media and Cut Sheet.

Place the cut sheet on the platen. (→ P.2-36)
On the printer operation panel, select the media type.
(→ P.2-38)

Information Power
Data
Message

Adjust the amount of media feed. (→ P.4-42)

Offline

Feed Papre

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Start the print job from the computer. (→ P.1-40)
Offline
Menu

Important
z You must make sure that the printer is switched on
before loading a cut sheet. Also, if the loaded sheet
does not match the media type selected on the
operation panel, this could cause a media loading
error or lead to poor print quality.
Note
z Store unused cut sheets in the original package. Store
the package in a cool, dry location that is not exposed
to direct sunlight.

When a roll is loaded, the printer will display
Remove RllMedia?
When another cut sheet is loaded, hold down the
Stop button for more than 1 sec., to display Remove
CutSheet?.

If either a cut sheet or roll media is loaded in
the printer, press the OK button.
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Remove either the cut sheet or the roll media.
(→ P.2-33, P.2-39)

2- 35

Index

Printing with Cut Sheets

Loading Cut Sheets
Follow this procedure to set a cut sheet on the platen.
First, if there is a cut sheet on the platen, remove it.

TOP
Open the upper cover and push the release
lever toward the rear.

Important
z When loading cut sheets that are longer than 914 mm
(36”), the trailing edge of the sheet will touch the floor
and may become dirty. When you set such a long cut
sheet, before you start the print job remove the roll
holder and spread a cloth or some paper on the floor,
or when the cut sheet starts to feed, tuck the trailing
edge into the output stacker.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z The platen may be fouled with ink so clean inside the
upper cover before you switch to printing on a large
size. (→ P.4-11)
z For more details about cut sheets that can be set on
the platen, please refer to “Media You Can Use” (→
P.2-2).
z The printhead may rub the surface of the curled media,
so try to correct the curl.

2- 36

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing with Cut Sheets

TOP

With the print side of the cut sheet facing up,
insert and press down parallel on the sheet
holder, making sure it is aligned with the line
(a) on the right and the orange line (b) at the
back.
b

z The platen of this printer is provided with holes through
which air is sucked to create the vacuum that holds the
paper on the platen. You may hear a sound from the
location where the paper is set; this is normal and
does not mean any problem.
z If you are concerned about the noise, shift the position
of the paper about 1mm to the left or right (but not
more than 1 mm).

Pull the release lever forward to close, raise
the upper cover stopper and release the
lock, then close the upper cover.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

When the cut sheet is inserted, the printer grabs it
and holds it on the platen.

Important
z Set a cut sheet parallel with the guideline on the right
side of the platen. If the cut sheet is skewed, this will
cause a skew error. If the error occurs, set the cut
sheet once again so it is aligned correctly.
Note
z The strength of the vacuum suction can be adjusted
while the release lever is open. If the media is difficult
to load, on the printer operation panel press [ ]
(stronger) or [ ] (weaker) to adjust the strength of the
suction.

2- 37

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Media Type is displayed.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing with Cut Sheets

TOP

Press [ ] or [ ] to select the name of the
media type then press OK.
Media Type
HW Coated

→

The (=) mark to the left of a setting indicates that cut
sheet type is currently selected, then the preparation
for the select media begins.
The printer detects no skew and if there is no
problem, then the printer enters the print standby
mode.
The table below lists the possible settings for the cut
sheet type. Only the settings of the type of media
that can be used with the type of black ink tank
mounted in the printer are displayed.
Media Name
Plain Paper
CAD Plain Paper
Plain Paper (High Quality)
Recycled Coated Paper
Coated Paper
Heavyweight Coated Paper
Premium Matte Paper
Extra Heavyweight Coated
Paper
Glossy Photo Paper
SemiGlos Photo Paper
Heavyweight Glossy Photo
Paper
Heavyweight SemiGlos
Photo Paper
Synthetic Paper

2- 38

Media Type Setting
Plain Paper
CAD Plain Paper
Plain Paper HQ
Recycled Coated
Coated Paper
HW Coated
Premium Matte
Ex HW Coated
Glossy Photo
Semi-Gl Photo
HW Glossy Photo
HW SemiGl Photo
Syn. Paper

Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Backlit Film
Flame-Resistant cloth
Proofing Paper
Newsprint for Proofing
Fine Art Photo
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo
Fine Art Textured
Canvas SemiGlos
Japanese Paper Washi
Colored Coated Paper
CAD Tracing Paper
CAD Translucent Matte Film
Special 1~5

Adh. Syn. Paper
Backlit Film
Flame-Res.Cloth
Proofing Paper 2
News Proof 1/2/3
FineArt Photo
FneArt HW Photo,
FineArt Txtr
Canvas Semi-Gl
JPN Paper Washi
Colored Coated
CAD Trace Paper
CAD Matte Film
Special 1~5

Important
z If the cut sheet is skewed, this will cause a skew error.
If a skew error occurs, start at Step 1 and set the cut
sheet again.
z Make sure that you have selected the correct setting
for the media type. If you have selected an incorrect
setting for the media type, perform the procedure in
“Selecting the Media Type” (→ P.2-32)
z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the
output stacker.
Note
z Before shipping a printer, the Media Type is set for
Plain Paper. Also, when the release lever is opened
and closed, the media type setting is reset
automatically to Plain Paper.
z The media size is detected automatically, therefore no
setting for the size is required.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing with Cut Sheets

If the output assist guides are not extended,
pull it out.

TOP
While holding the media, push the release
lever back to open then remove the media.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Important
z The output assists guides should always be extended
for printing. If they are not extended, this could lead to
poor print quality.

Removing a Cut Sheet
Follow the procedure below to remove a cut sheet from the
printer.

Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second.
Online
Bk

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Press the OK button.
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop

2- 39

The loaded cut sheet is ejected at the front and then
rests on the platen.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Pull the release lever forward to close it.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Adjusting the Height of the Printhead

TOP

Adjusting the Height of the Printhead
It is possible to achieve the higher print quality by adjusting
the height of the printhead. Follow the procedure below to
operate.
Adjust the height of the printhead. (→ P.2-40)

Adjusting Printhead Height

Set a cut sheet of the type you intend to use.
(→ P.2-26, P.2-35)

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
Information Power
Data
Message

Offline

Feed Paper
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Adjust the position of the printhead. (→ P.4-40)
Start the print job from the computer. (→ P.1-40)
After completing the special print job, return the
printhead height to its original setting and re-align the
printhead. (→ P.2-42)

Important
z After changing the height of the printhead, always
adjust the print mode. If you do not perform the
adjustments, you cannot achieve the best print results.
z When printing on paper-base media (ex: Coated
Paper, Plain Paper) or any type of media that wrinkles
easily, never print with the printhead lower than the
best height for each media. This could also damage
the printer.
Note
z Press the Information button to display Head Height
and the current printhead height to confirm that the
setting correct for the media in use.

2- 40

Online

Offline
Menu

Press [ ] (or [ ]) to select Chng Head
Hght then press [ ].
Information Power
Data
Message

MAIN MENU
Chng Head Hght
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Online

Offline
Menu

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

] to select Yes, then press

Chng Head Hght
= Yes
The carriage moves to the center when you see
Carriage Moving.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Adjusting the Height of the Printhead

Open the upper cover when you see Open
UpperCover, then Chng Head Hght is
displayed.

TOP
Adjust the height of the printhead with the
printhead height adjustment lever.
When printing on CAD Plain Paper, CAD Tracing
Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, set the lever to
the low position (a), when printing on Canvas
SemiGlos set the lever to the high position (c), and
for all other media set the lever to the middle (b)
(standard). If the printhead is scratching the surface
of media that ripples or wrinkles easily, rather than
use the recommended printhead height for that
media, set the lever one step higher.
c
b
a

Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
z If the printhead height adjustment lever is dirty, before
continuing with this procedure, wring out a damp cloth
and use it to clean the printhead height adjustment
lever. (→ P.4-11)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
The carriage returns to the home when you see
Carriage Moving. The printer returns to the print
ready status.

2- 41

Index

Adjusting the Height of the Printhead

Aligning the Printhead
After the printhead height has been adjusted, on the printer
operation panel adjust select Auto Head Adj. > Standard
Adj. to adjust the printhead.“Aligning the Printhead”
(→ P.4-40)

Re-adjusting Printhead Height
After the print job is finished, especially before starting the
next print with another type of media, you must do the
procedure to reset the printhead height adjustment lever to
the optimum position for the next media.
“Adjusting Printhead Height” (→ P.2-40)
After re-adjusting the printhead height position, you should
once again use the operation panel to align the printhead.
“Aligning the Printhead” (→ P.4-40)

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

2- 42

Index

TOP

Chapter 3 Printing Methods for Different Objectives
Click on the checkbox to print the section contents.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Printing from Windows ...............................................................................3-2
Before You Begin .................................................................................................. 3-2
Enlarging and Reducing the Original ..................................................................... 3-6
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) .............. 3-13
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) ............................ 3-22
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) ......................................... 3-24
Printing Posters (Page Layout) ............................................................................ 3-26
Using Watermarks ............................................................................................... 3-28
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ........................................ 3-30
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) .............................. 3-38
Custom Print Quality ............................................................................................ 3-39
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing .......................................................................... 3-42
About Media Size Options ................................................................................... 3-51
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean ............................................................... 3-56
Software Provided for Windows .......................................................................... 3-56

Printing from Macintosh ............................................................................3-59
Before You Begin ............................................................................................... 3-59
Enlarging and Reducing the Original ................................................................... 3-65
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) .............. 3-77
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) ............................ 3-86
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) ......................................... 3-89
Printing Posters (Page Layout) ........................................................................... 3-92
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ........................................ 3-94
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) ............................ 3-100
Custom Print Quality .......................................................................................... 3-103
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing ........................................................................ 3-107
Custom Sizes (User Print Settings) .................................................................. 3-121
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean ............................................................. 3-125
Software Provided for Macintosh ....................................................................... 3-126

3- 1

How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages

Start Print → Before clicking the Start Print button

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

Printing from Windows
This printer driver provides a variety of printer functions to
meet your printing needs. In this chapter we will introduce
these functions.

Before You Begin
There are some functions you should remember and use
when you use this printer. Before you use the printer for
different printing tasks, please read this section.

Type of Printing

3- 2

Content

Basic Settings to Meet Your Needs (Type
of Printing)
To achieve the best printing, you must adjust the color and
other settings for the objective of the document. This printer
driver provides superior settings frequently used to produce
posters, POP ads, digital camera prints, CAD designs, and
other prints. Just select from the list the type of document
you need and perform the basic procedure for the print job.
The following applications are provided for the types of
prints shown below.

Paper Type

Setting Values
Print
Matching
Quality
Method

Best for printing normal
documents, with text, images,
graphics, etc. mixed together.

Plain Paper

POP Ad

Best for printing mixed text
and illustrations with bright
and forceful eyecatching such
as store posters.

Heavyweight Coated
Paper

Standard Saturation

Poster

Best for printing posters with
centered photographs.

Proofing Paper *1
Heavyweight Coated
Paper *2

Standard

Auto

Contrast: +10
Brightness: +5

Photo
(from digital
camera)

Best for printing photos
captured with a digital
camera.

Glossy Photo Paper *1
Heavyweight Coated
Paper *2

Standard

Perceptual
(Photo
graphic)

Contrast: +10
Brightness: +5

Photo (from
scanner)

Best for reproduction of scanned
photographs with color faithful to
the quality of the original.

Glossy Photo Paper *1
Heavyweight Coated
Paper *2

Standard Colorimetric

Auto

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Color Adjustment

Default
Settings

Standard

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Default

Contrast: +5

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Default

Index

Printing from Windows

Type of Printing

TOP
Content

Best for long banner formats
Long Formats
(vertical and horizontal) with
(Banner)
mixed illustrations and text.
CAD

Best for plans and design
drawings with fine lines.

Paper Type
Heavyweight Coated
Paper

Standard Saturation

CAD Plain Paper

Standard Saturation

*1. Photo Black Ink (BK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer.
*2. Matte Black Ink (MBK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer.

Note
z For more details about print quality, please refer to
“Custom Print Quality” in “Customizing Print Quality”.
(→ P.3-39)
z For more details about color mode matching and color
adjustments, please refer to “Fine Adjusting Color for
Printing” in “Adjusting Color” (→ P.3-42) see “Color
Matching” (→ P.3-46).
To perform the settings for a print, first open the Main
sheet of the printer driver and then from Print Preferences select the type of printing that you want to perform.

Setting Values
Print
Matching
Quality
Method

Color Adjustment
Contrast: +10
Brightness: +5

Default

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 3

Index

Printing from Windows

Note
z The item in the list marked by the red ball contains the
settings that the printer is already set up to execute.
z You can use the Add and Edit buttons to add and edit
the printing types. For more details, refer to Using a
Print Preference > Adding a Print Preference, or
Editing a Print Preference in the online Help.

Printer Driver Settings at a Glance
(Settings Preview)
The Preview illustrates the content of the current printer
driver settings. If you change the page size and orientation, feed method, etc., you can confirm their immediate
effect easily by viewing the effect of the new settings in
the Preview image.

TOP
The Preview reflects changes in the settings described
below.
Setting Preview Description
A

C
A

The following settings are shown in the Preview
image.
:Borderless Printing, Color Mode, Orientation,
Layout, Watermark
This displays the sizes of the Page Size and Media
Size settings. Also, when the Enlarged/Reduced
Printing and Borderless Printing items are
selected, the mode and magnification are also
displayed.
The following settings are shown in the Preview
image.
:Media Source, Borderless Printing, Enlarged/
Reduced Printing, Automatic Cutting Settings,
Print Centered, No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper), Rotate Page 90 degrees
(Conserve Paper), Orientation, Rotate 180
degrees, Mirror

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 4

Index

Printing from Windows

Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)
There is one more function that displays the print image
of the document in the Preview. This other image is
called the Print Preview. If you set the Print Preview to
display in the printer driver before the print job, the Preview will display at the start of every print job for you to
check and prevent failed print jobs.
To have the Print Preview display, open the Main tab of
the printer driver and select Open Preview When Print
Job Starts.

TOP
When you execute a print job an edit screen (Page Composer) opens. Double-click the name of the document
that is ready to print and display its Preview for confirmation.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 5

Index

Printing from Windows

Once you have confirmed that the image layout on the
media is correct, you can close the Preview. After selecting the document name with PageComposer and confirming its appearance, start the print job from the File
menu.

TOP
Enlarging and Reducing the Original
The original can be printed at a larger or smaller size.
There are three methods for enlargement and reduction.

z Enlarging or reducing printing to fit the size of
the media (→ P.3-7)
z Enlarging or reducing fit the roll paper width
(→ P.3-9)
z Setting the desired scaling rate and printing.
(→ P.3-11)

Note
z One the document name (print data) is selected in the
PageComposer, you can edit the document as needed
with the items in the Edit menu. For more details about
these editing features, please refer to the
PageComposer online Help.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Note
z When you need to enlarge TIFF image data or JPEG
images captured with a digital camera, in Adobe
Photoshop or a similar software application set the
resolution setting above 150 dpi to achieve better
printing results.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 6

Index

Printing from Windows

Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the
Size of the Media

By setting the size of the media actually loaded for printing, you can automatically enlarge or reduce the print
automatically to match the size of the loaded media.

TOP
For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
select the size of the original created in the
software application.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Select the Page Setup sheet.

Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 7

Index

Printing from Windows

Note
z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing
selection. The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox
will appear.

5
6

TOP
Check the Preview and confirm that the
media size selection has changed, then click
the OK button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Confirm that Fit Media Size is selected
under Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

From Media Size select the size of the
media that will be used for printing.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Note
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview
before printing. For more details about how to display
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Contents

3- 8

Index

Printing from Windows

Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width

You can enlarge or reduce the entire size of the original
so it fits the width of the roll.

TOP
For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
select the size of the original created in the
software application.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Printer dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 9

Index

Printing from Windows

Note
z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing
selection. The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox
will appear.

Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select
Fit Roll Paper Width.

TOP
Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Note
z Before you start the print job, confirm that the width of
the roll selected in the printer driver is the same as the
width of the roll loaded in the printer. If the printer
driver setting does not match the width of the loaded
roll, the print job will halt temporarily.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll
Paper Width to open the dialog box below. From the
Roll Paper Width list select the width of the roll
loaded in the printer, then click the OK button.

3- 10

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Selecting the Magnification Rate for
Printing

You can enter the rate of magnification directly if you
need to scale the enlargement or reduction for a desired
effect.

TOP
For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
select the size of the original created in the
software application.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Printer dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 11

Index

Printing from Windows

Note
z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing selection.
The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox will appear.

Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select
Scaling then specify the desired setting.

TOP
z Reduction is performed starting from the upper left
corner of the image, but if you select Print Centered
on the Layout sheet, the image will print in the center
of the media.
z When Scaling is selected, the maximum possible rate
of magnification is displayed to the right of the
magnification entry box.

6
7

Select the Media Size setting that you want.
Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The print job starts.

Important
z You can enter a setting for the rate of magnification
manually from the keyboard or use the arrow button on
the right to scroll the number settings up or down. The
rate can be changed in increments of 1%. The size
can be scaled in the range limited by the size of the
Scaling entry column displayed on the right.
z You can perform a setting that is larger than the size of
the media loaded in the printer, but some portions of
the will be cut off and not printed.

3- 12

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

Printing Photos and Illustrations without
Borders (Borderless Printing)
Normally a printed document has white space around its
edges (margins), but a borderless print for a photograph or
created image has no white space at its borders; its entire
surface is covered by printing.

Settings Required for Borderless Printing
Before performing the print job, make sure that a media
that can be used for borderless printing is loaded. Only
media fed from the roll can be used for borderless printing on this printer.
Here is a list of the types of roll media and their widths
that can be used for borderless printing.
Paper Type
Glossy Photo Paper, SemiGlos
Photo Paper, Heavyweight Glossy
Photo Paper, Heavyweight
SemiGlos Photo Paper,
Heavyweight Coated Paper,
Premium Matte Paper, Extra
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Matte
Film, Flame Resistant-Cloth, Fine
Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight
Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas
SemiGlos, Special 1-5

3- 13

Corresponding Roll Width
10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
14-in. Roll (355.6mm)
16-in. Roll (355.6 mm)
JIS B2/B3 Roll
(515.0 mm)
ISO A1/A2 Roll
(594.0 mm)
24-in. Roll (609.6mm)

Important
z Paper of types and roll widths other than those listed
above cannot be used for borderless printing.
z The following types of media cannot be Auto cut, so
borderless printing can only be performed on the left
and right edges.
Premium Matte Paper, Flame Resistant Cloth, Fine Art
Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured,
Canvas SemiGlos

Basic Procedure for Borderless Printing
This section introduces the basic procedure for borderless
printing by using media of the same size as the original.

Create the original in the software application
so it matches the size of the media used for
printing.

Important
z The following page size settings can be used for
borderless printing. Refer to the table below when you
create the original image and set the page for a size
that can be used for borderless printing.
z If the media size was pre-selected in the software
application, the selected size must support
Borderless Printing.
Borderless printing
on media the same
size as the original
document

ISO A1, ISO A2, JIS B2, JIS
B3, ARCH D (24”), ARCH C,
20”x24”, 14”x17”, 10”x12”,
10”x15”, 8”x10”, US Photo
(16”x20”)

Borderless printing
with enlargement and
reduction

All page sizes

z There are limitations on the selection of page sizes
that can be used with the Borderless Printing
Method. If any page size other than those listed above
is selected, the Borderless Printing Method feature
is automatically set for Scale to fit Roll Width.
z For more details about Scale to fit Roll Width and
Print Image with Actual Size, please refer to “More
About Borderless Printing Methods” (→ P.3-17)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

トップ
TOP

Note
z Make sure the image created for borderless printing covers the entire original page.
z If you are using Microsoft Word or any other software application that allows margin settings, set all the margins to “0”.
For more details about how to perform these settings, please refer to the software application instructions.

Open the printer driver dialog box from the Printer dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 “Basic
Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Display the Main sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.

1. Select the media compatible with borderless printing.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

2. If you check the checkbox for Open Preview When
Print Job Starts, you can confirm the appearance of
the print image in the Print Preview before printing.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 14

Index

Printing from Windows

トップ
TOP

Display the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.
1. For Page Size select the size of the original created in the
software application.
2. Select Borderless Printing.

* If you select the paper for a size that can be used for
borderless printing, Scale to fit the Page Size is set for
Borderless Printing Method.
3. Confirm that the width of the roll paper matches the roll
paper or the page size for Media Source.

* The Preview reflects changes in the contents of the settings.

Note
z If you change the page size to any other size that allows borderless printing, the setting for the width of the roll changes
automatically to a roll width that matches the original width.
z If you change the page width setting to a size that does not allow borderless printing, the dialog box below opens.
Specify a setting in the Roll Paper Width list, then click the OK button so you can continue with the borderless print (in
this case the width of the original will be enlarged or reduced to fit the width of the roll media). The print cannot be
performed with the same width as the original.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 15

Index

Printing from Windows

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

TOP
z To enlarge or reduce while performing borderless
printing, under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit
Roll Paper Width.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Note
z If Scale to fit the Page Size is selected for
Borderless Printing Method, the printer driver
automatically enlarges the original up to every edge of
the page to a margin of 3 mm. The result is the printer
fills the entire page up to the edges with borderless
printing. The top, bottom, left and right margins of the
original are set to 3 mm so no part of the image will
extend beyond a margin.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

z To do a borderless print of an image with a top and
bottom margin, on the Layout sheet you can select No
Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper). This an
easy way to do a borderless print by setting these
margins to zero. For more details, please refer to
“Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve
Paper)”. (→ P.3-38)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 16

Index

Printing from Windows

More About Borderless Printing Methods
There are two ways to create a document for borderless
printing in addition to the methods described above
(Scale to fit the Page Size).

z Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width
This features enlarges or reduces the size of the original so it fits the width of the roll. You can print a page
size not compatible with borderless printing (A4, A3,
Custom Size, etc.) on roll media of a width that is compatible with enlargement/reduction printing.

1
2

TOP
Create the original in the software application
so it matches the size of the media used for
printing.
Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 17

Index

Printing from Windows

トップ
TOP

Display the Main sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

1. Select the media compatible with borderless printing.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

2. If you check the checkbox for Open Preview When
Print Job Starts, you can confirm the appearance of
the print image in the Print Preview before printing.

Display the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.
1. For Page Size select the size of the original created in
the software application.
2. Select Borderless Printing.
* The example shows A4 size that cannot be used for
borderless printing is selected.
* For Borderless Printing Method, Scale to fit Roll
Paper Width will be selected.
3. To change the setting of the roll paper width, select the
width for the Roll Paper Width list.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

* The Preview reflects changes in the contents of the settings.

3- 18

Index

Printing from Windows

Note
z If the size of the selected original cannot be used with
borderless printing, select Borderless Printing to
open the dialog box below. Select the width of the roll
loaded in the printer, and then click OK. Borderless
Printing Method will be set to Scale to fit Roll Paper
Width.

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

3- 19

TOP
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Note
z After the Scale to fit Roll Paper Width feature
automatically sizes to original to fit the width of the roll,
the printer driver automatically enlarges the image so
that each margin, that is, the top, bottom, left, and right
margin, is 3 mm each. The result is the printer fills the
entire page up to the edges with borderless printing.
Portions of the image that protrude over the 3 mm top,
bottom, right, and left margins of the original document
cannot be printed.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

z Print Image with Actual Size
This takes an image that would otherwise overlap the
margins and sizes it to 3 mm margins and then prints it
with borderless printing on a media size that is the
same as the sized original. Use this method when you
want to avoid a deterioration in the quality of the image
caused by enlargement or reduction.

3- 20

In the software application create an image
with borders (top, bottom, right, left) 3 mm
larger than the original document.

Note
z Example: If the media size is JIS B2 (515 x 728 mm),
set the dimensions for the original as 521 x 734 mm.
z If you are using MS-Word or another application,
before you create the original select Page Setup from
the File menu and select the page size and
orientation.

Note
z If you perform the print job with Borderless Printing
Method set for either Scale to fit the Page Size or
Scale to fit Roll Paper Width, some slight
deterioration in the quality of the image may occur
because the printer driver automatically sizes the
portions of the image that would otherwise overlap the
margins. If you select Print Image with Actual Size
for the Borderless Printing Method, however, you
can perform print high-precision images with
borderless printing just as they are. Select this setting
when you need to print fine lines, photographs, or with
any image where the priority is on accuracy and
quality.

TOP

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

トップ
TOP

Display the Main sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

1. Select the media compatible with borderless printing.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

2. If you check the checkbox for Open Preview When
Print Job Starts, you can confirm the appearance of
the print image in the Print Preview before printing.

Display the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.

1. For Page Size select the size of the original created in
the software application.
2. Select Boderless Printing.
3. For Borderless Printing Method select Print Image
with Actual Size.
4. Confirm that the width of the roll paper matches the roll
paper or the page size for Media Source.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

* The Preview reflects changes in the contents of the settings.

3- 21

Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

In order to maximize the use of the paper width a verticaltall image can be rotated 90 degrees horizontally across the
width of the media. By rotating the image you can maximize
the use of the media and reduce waste.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

If you perform this setting in the printer to rotate the page
image, then the page is rotated automatically for the print
job. The image will not be rotated if it would not fit after
rotation.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Important
z Confirm that the Roll Paper Width setting is correct
for the media loaded in the printer.
z If the selection for the Media Source is not Roll Paper,
or if Borderless Printing is selected, this function
cannot be used.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 22

Index

Printing from Windows

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

TOP
Select Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve
Paper).

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

2
3

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Select the Page Setup sheet.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
select the size of the original created in the
software application.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

3- 23

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Printing Several Pages on One Sheet
(Page Layout)

TOP
Select the Layout sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

You can print from 2 to 16 pages with reduced sizes on one
sheet. For example, if you have a document with a large
number of pages you can print two pages per sheet and the
number of pages will be one-half. Also, in the Page Layout
Printing dialog box you can perform more detailed settings,
such as selecting the arrangement of the pages on the
sheet and specifying whether to print each page with a
border line.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Select Page Layout.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Important
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0.

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

3- 24

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
The Preview shows you want the printed page will
look like with the number of pages selected for one
sheet, then click the Set button in the lower right
corner of the Page Layout group.

Index

Printing from Windows

From the Page Layout list, select the page
layout that you want to print.

TOP
To change the arrangement of the pages on
the sheet, select the page order from the
Page Order list.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

7
5

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

If you want each page on the sheet to print
with a border line, from the Page Border list
click the type of border.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

If you want to change the arrangement of the
pages on the sheet or specify each page to
print with a border line, click the Set button to
open the Page Layout Printing dialog box.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z If you select a border line to print, the image is sized
down by 5% to allow for the border line.
z As soon as you select a border line, you will see this
reflected in the Preview.
z If you select None then the size of the page is not
reduced.

3- 25

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Click the OK button to close the Page
Layout Printing dialog box.

Index

Printing from Windows

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

TOP
Printing Posters (Page Layout)
After the image is enlarged and divided into several
sections, you can print the print the sections and paste
them together to assemble one large poster.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Important
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0.

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 26

Index

Printing from Windows

Select the Layout sheet.

TOP
Select Poster 2x2 from the Layout list.
Confirm the appearance of the selected layout in the
Preview.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Select Page Layout.

If you do not want to print any panel (a section
of the divided image), click the Set button in the
lower right corner of the Page Layout section
to open the Pages to Print dialog box.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 27

Index

Printing from Windows

Click and select either the panel or the
appropriate checkbox to deselect the panel
for printing.

TOP
Using Watermarks
You can print watermarks on printouts to mark them for
special handling. Several standard watermarks
(CONFIDENTIAL, DO NOT COPY, etc.) have been
prepared.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Note
z If you click the Invert button, the current selections of
the checkmarks are reversed. In the Preview area you
will see graphic images displayed for the sections to
be printed and white blanks for the sections that will
not be printed.

7
8

Click the OK button to close the Pages to
Print dialog box.
Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

3- 28

Important
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0.
z The Watermark function cannot be used if the print job
is set up with a poster page layout.

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Index

Printing from Windows

Select the Layout sheet.

TOP
From the Watermark list, select the
watermark that you want to print.
The watermark that you selected will appear in the
Preview on the left.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Select Watermark.

Note
z The following watermarks can be selected from the list.
CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DRAFT, FILE COPY, FINAL,
PRELIMINARY, PROOF, TOP SECRET.
z Click the Edit Watermark button to open the Edit
Watermark dialog box. In this dialog box you can
create, edit, and register your own watermarks, in
addition to the pre-made watermarks provided with the
printer driver. For more details, please refer to Printing
Watermarks > Creating an Original Watermark, or
Editing and Deleting an Original Watermark.

3- 29

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

TOP
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing
(Long Prints)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Matching the Width of the Roll
Once you become familiar with fitting images to the full
width of the roll with your software application, it is very
easy to print vertical and horizontal banners.
Here we will describe as an example how to take a 3.94
in. x 19.67 in. original and enlarge to fit a 24” roll (approximately 610 mm wide), and then print it as a banner
(24.00 in. x 128.90 in.).

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Note
z This printer can print a sheet up to 15, 250 mm (600in.)
long.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 30

Index

Printing from Windows

1
2
3

Start the software application.

TOP
Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

From the File menu select Print to open the
Print dialog box.
Confirm that the printer name Canon
W6400PG is displayed.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

The sample of the Print dialog box below is from
Microsoft Word.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Click the Size Options button to open the
Media Size Options dialog box.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z If the above printer name is not displayed, then select
Canon W6400PG from the Name list.

Click the Properties button to open the
printer driver dialog box.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 31

Index

Printing from Windows

トップ
TOP

Define the size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
1. Input the desired Custom Media Size Name.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

2. For Media Size set the Width and the Height.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

* This example shows 3.94 in for the Width and 19.67 in
for the Height.
3. Click the Add button.
4. Click the OK button to close the Media Size Options
dialog box.

Note
z After you register a size in the Media Size Options dialog box, then the name and dimensions that you set for new size
will appear in the Media Size List. For more details about the Media Size Options dialog box, please refer to “About
Media Size Options”. (→ P.3-51)
z In addition to the method above for setting the media size, you can also use the Custom Size Settings dialog box. To
open the Custom Size Settings dialog box, click Page Size on the Page Setup sheet.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 32

Index

Printing from Windows

z A custom size sets a temporary user-defined page size
between the software application and the printer driver.
For this reason, when the software application is
closed the size defined in the Custom Size Settings
dialog box is disabled. If you want the custom size
setting to remain in effect, then you should register the
custom size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
z Some software applications may not display a custom
size item. In such a case, please register the custom
size in the Media Size Options dialog box.

8
9

TOP

a Select the Paper Size sheet, then for the size select
the size you defined and registered in the Media
Size Options dialog box.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Click the OK button to close the printer driver
dialog box.
Click the Close button to close the Page
Layout Printing dialog box.
In the software application select Page
Setup from the File menu to open the Page
Setup dialog box.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

b Select Landscape for the Orientation, then click
the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Note
z This sets the Orientation to Landscape for the
banner.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 33

Index

Printing from Windows

a Select the Page sheet, then for the Paper Size
select the size you defined and registered in the
Medial Size Options dialog box.

TOP
c Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog
box.

Note
z For Display click Zoom to adjust the size of the
display.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

b Select Landscape for the Orientation, then click
the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Note
z This sets the Orientation to Landscape for the banner.

a In the Page Setup dialog enter the dimensions for
the custom size settings in the Width and Height
boxes. This example shows 3.94 inches for the
Width and 19.67 inches for the Height.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 34

Index

Printing from Windows

b Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog
box.

Note
z Also when printing the original from PowerPoint if you
select Scale to fit Paper in the Print dialog box the
driver will size the page to fit the media loaded in the
printer.

TOP
Create the original in the software
application.

Note
z The example below shows the original created in
Microsoft Word. Select Insert > Picture > WordArt,
select the appropriate style, then enter the text.
z For more details about how to create the original,
please refer to the operating instructions for each
software application.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

12
13

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

After the original is created, from the File
menu select Print to open the Print dialog
box.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Click the Properties button to open the
printer driver dialog box.

Contents

3- 35

Index

Printing from Windows

トップ
TOP

Select the Main sheet and perform the settings for a long print.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
1. For Print Preferences select Long Format (Banner).
2. For Media Type select the type of media.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Select the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for a long print.
1. For Page Size select the media name registered in
Media Size Options.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

2. Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing and click Fit Roll
Paper Width.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

3. For Media Source select the Roll Paper and for Paper
Roll Width select 24-in. Roll (609.6 mm).

3- 36

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing
selection. The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox
will appear.
z Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll
Paper Width to open the dialog box below. Select the
width of the roll loaded in the printer, and then click
OK.

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

TOP
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

Note
z If the print job does not execute properly on you
operating system (Windows Server 2003, Windows
XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows 98), click
Special Settings on the Layout sheet to open the
Special Settings dialog box. You may be able to
enable printing by clicking the Fine Zoom list and then
selecting On.
z If you cannot perform the print job with Windows NT
4.0, you may be able to enable printing by selecting
Standard or Draft under Print Quality on the Main
sheet.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 37

Index

Printing from Windows

Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper)
The white space in the top and bottom margins can be
eliminated for printing to save paper. The printer does not
feed the white space in the margins to save paper. This
function can be used only when Roll Paper is selected as
the Media Source.

TOP
Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Select the Layout sheet.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Note
z You use this method during borderless printing as
shown in the illustration below.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

3- 38

Important
z This function cannot be used when Cut Sheet is
selected as the Media Source.
z With this feature cannot be selected with Poster (2 x
2) set for the page layout.

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Select No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper).

TOP
Custom Print Quality
Customizing Print Quality
When you need to frequently perform combined settings
for print quality and print speed, you can select Custom
Settings under Print Quality and then do the print quality and resolution settings in the Custom Settings dialog
box according to the requirements of your requirements.
For example, if you need to set up printing text mixed
with photos or graphics, or some other such job, you can
raise the text resolution and lower the photo or graphic
resolution.

1
4

Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
then click the OK button.

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.

3- 39

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.

TOP
From the Print Quality list, select Custom
Settings.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

A Settings button appears in the lower right corner
of the Print Quality group.

Click the Settings button in the Print
Quality group to open the Custom Settings
dialog box.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 40

Index

Printing from Windows

From the Print Quality list, select the quality
settings.

TOP
z If one of the types of media below is selected, Draft
cannot be selected under Print Quality.
Premium Matte Paper, Glossy Photo, SemiGlos Photo
Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Synthetic Paper, Adhesive
Synthetic Paper, Backlit Film, Flame Resistant Cloth,
Japanese Paper Washi, CAD Translucent Matte Film

Highest
High
Standard
Draft

Content
Prioritizes attaining the highest image
quality for printing.
Prioritizes attaining high image quality
for printing.
Attains a stable image at an average
printing speed.
Prioritizes high printing speed but you
should check layout and other aspects
of the image after printing.

z The items that are available for selection under Print
Quality may differ depending on which print media are
used. Here is a list of the media where Highest under
Print Quality is available.
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlossy Photo Paper, Japanese Paper Washi, CAD
Translucent Matte Film

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Important
z The resolution is set automatically depending on which
print quality item is selected as shown below. If you
need to change the resolution you can perform so with
the setting under Print Quality.
Print Quality Resolution
Highest,
Fine
High,
(600 dpi)
Standard

Standard, Quick
Draft
(300 dpi)

3- 41

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Confirm the resolution.

Note
z The print quality settings that you can select for the
custom settings are described below.
Print Quality

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Content
Print speed is slower due to
the higher resolution
setting. Achieves the best
printing results, but printing
time is longer and a large
amount of computer
memory is required.
Print speed is faster due to
the lower resolution setting.
Printing time is shorter and
not as much computer
memory is required.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

z Even with Print Quality set to Standard, the
Resolution is fixed at Fine (600 dpi) if one of the
settings below is selected for Media Type. If any other
media is selected, the Resolution is fixed at Quick
(300 dpi).
Premium Matte Paper, Backlit Film, Fine Art Photo,
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas SemiGlos, CAD Plain Paper, CAD Tracing Paper,
CAD Translucent Matte Film

Click the OK button to close the Custom
Settings dialog box.

Note
z If you select Enhance Text with Photos in the
Custom Settings dialog box then when you have text
mixed with photos or graphic data, the resolution of the
text will be raised and the resolution of the photos or
graphics will be lowered.
z Only the Halftone and Error Diffusion custom
settings can be set. Error diffusion arranges nonstandard pixels and displays them as gradations
(halftones). This setting is ideal for photographs or
graphic images that require printing with fine
gradations.

TOP
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing
Adjusting Color
Basically the color settings of the software application
have priority, but if the results of a print job are not what
you want you can also adjust color in the printer driver.
You can also take color photos captured with a scanner
or a digital camera, or any other color image, and print
them in monochrome.
We will introduce color adjustment.

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 42

Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.
Note
z Color Mode presents these following items for
selection.
Color Mode
Color
Monochrome
(Photo):
Monochrome
Solid Color

On the Main sheet select Color Mode then
Color.

Black Only

Content
Prints in color.
Provides stable monochrome photo
printing with minimal tone change
and enables detailed adjustment of
gray scale gradations and color
tones.
Prints in monochrome.
Prints with only a limited number of
colors. Use this setting when you
need fine lines with light colors in a
sharp image.
All colors other than white are
printed black.

Important
z Monochrome (Photo) can be selected for Color Mode
only if one of the following types of paper is selected:
Glossy Photo Paper/Semi-Glossy Photo Paper/
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight
SemiGlos Photo Paper/Fine Art Photo/Fine Art
Heavyweight Photo/Fine Art Textured/Japanese Paper
Washi

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 43

Index

Printing from Windows

Select Manual Color Settings then click the
Color Settings button.

TOP
The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Note
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color,
Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for
Color Mode.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 44

Index

Printing from Windows

Confirm that the Color Adjustment sheet is
displayed, then click the Object Adjustment
button.
The Object Adjustment dialog box opens.

TOP
Drag the slide bar to the left or right for the
item that you want to adjust. You can also
enter the value direction or use the arrows of
the spinbox to rapidly raise or lower the
value.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Select the item that you want to adjust:
Image, Graphics, or Text.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z Note that for this printer driver all the items (Image,
Graphics, Text) are selected as the default settings.

3- 45

Click the OK button to close the Object
Adjustment dialog box.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Note
z Color Adjustment presents the following items for
selection.
Color Adjustment
Content
Cyan
You can calibrate the hues for Cyan,
Magenta
Magenta, Yellow.
Yellow
Contrast

Adjusts the relative contrast from
brightest to darkest colors.

Vivid

Adjusts the relative contrast from
brightest to darkest colors.

Brightness

Adjusts brightness from the darkest to
brightest colors so none are lost in the
brightness of the printed image.

Gray Tone
Adjustment

Adjusts grayscale from cool colors
(blue tones) to warm colors (red
tones).

Important
z As you change each item, the image of the Preview
on the left changes to reflect the adjustment. The
Original shows the appearance of the initial settings,
and the Preview reflects the current settings.
z Even after performing the settings on the Color
Adjustment sheet if you remove the selections of the
Manual Color Settings the Color Adjustment
settings are disabled. Remove the Color Adjustment
selection if you do not want to perform color
adjustments.

3- 46

TOP
Click the OK button to close the Color
Settings dialog box.

Color Matching
When you print an image captured with a scanner or a
digital camera, sometimes the appearance of the printout
does not match what you see on the screen.
This is caused by differences between the display color
and the printed color. In the Color Settings dialog box
you can use the items on the Matching sheet, that is,
select a color profile ICC (International Color Consortium), or ICM (Image Color Management), or select a
matching mode, input profile, or printer profile, to have
the hues of the colors on the screen more closely resemble the colors in the printout.

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.
Note
z Color Mode presents these following items for selection.
Color Mode
Color
Monochrome
(Photo):
Monochrome
Solid Color

On the Main sheet select Color for Color
Mode.

Black Only

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 47

Index

Printing from Windows

Select Manual Color Settings then click the
Color Settings button.

TOP
The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Note
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color,
Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for
Color Mode.

In the Color Settings dialog box, select the
Matching sheet.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 48

Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

From the Matching Mode list, select the
matching mode.

Matching Mode

Calibrates color in the printer driver
using the Windows ICM function for
color calibration at the host
Host ICM Mode computer.
* This mode is displayed only for
Windows Server 2003, Windows
XP, and Windows 2000.

Off

Note
z Here is a list of the available Matching Modes.
Matching Mode

Content

Driver Matching Calibrates color using the original
Mode
color profile of the printer driver.

3- 49

ICC Matching
Mode

Calibrates the color in the printer
driver using the standards of ICC
color profiles.

Driver ICM
Mode

Calibrates color in the printer driver
using the Windows ICM function for
color calibration.
*This mode is displayed only for
Windows Server 2003, Windows
XP, and Windows 2000.

Content

Does not execute color matching.
The color matching is performed in
the software application or
performed by and independent
color profile; select when you want
the color matching of the printer
driver is ignored.

Important
z The mode you select for the Matching Mode affects
what items are available for selection.
z The warning message below is displayed for Driver
ICM Mode, and Host ICM Mode. If you do not want to
disable the color adjustments, click the No button.
After you click No, the Driver ICM Mode and Host
ICM Mode cannot be selected.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

When ICC Matching Mode is selected for
the Matching Mode, at Image under Input
Profile Settings select a profile from the
Input Profile list.

TOP
Select a matching method from the input
profile Matching Method list.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Note
z If you want to perform different settings for Graphics
and Text, then you must cancel the selection of Use
the Same Profile for All Objects.

3- 50

Note
z Matching Method presents the following items for selection.
Matching Method
Content

Automatic

Makes the best selections for the
Image, Graphics, and Text items.
*This item is available only when
Driver Matching Mode is selected.

Perceptual
(Photographic)

This is the best mode for photographs.
Achieves the best color results
matching the hues of the colors on the
screen with those in the printout, also
provides smooth gradation.

Colorimetric

Faithfully reproduces the input data.
Performs white color calibration, so there
is no color when white data is output.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Matching Method
Content
Colorimetric
Faithfully reproduces the input data.
(No White Point No white point correction is
Correction)
performed.
This is the best mode for graphics.
Saturation
Achieves the best results with priority
on color saturation.

From the Printer Profile Settings list, select
a printer profile.

TOP
About Media Size Options
Creating Custom Sizes
On the Page Setup sheet of the printer driver click the
Size Options... button to open the Media Size Options
dialog box. In this dialog box you can create definitions
of original media sizes and register them. Once a custom
size has been defined, it will be listed along with the
standard sizes and be available for selection.

Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application.

Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z A print profile can be selected only when ICC
Matching Mode is selected under the Matching
Mode.

10
3- 51

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Click the OK button to close the Color
Settings dialog box.

Index

Printing from Windows

Select the Page Setup sheet.

TOP
Click the Size Options... button to open the
Media Size Options dialog box.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 52

Index

Printing from Windows

トップ
TOP

Define the size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
1. Input the media size you create for Custom Media Size
Name.

2. Select the unit for the size and click.
3. Enter Width and Height you want in Media Size.

4. Click the Add button.

After you click the Add button, the user-defined media name registered in the Media Size List of the Media Size
Options dialog box and the media size are displayed.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 53

Index

Printing from Windows

Note
z As soon as you select the name of a media size from
the Media Size List, the Width and Height settings of
the selected size are automatically entered.
z If Borderless Printing Size is selected, the selection
for Width changes automatically to a roll width that
supports borderless printing. Select a Width setting for
the width of the desired roller, then enter the Height
that you want.
z If you want to fix the ratio between the width and
height, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height. If
you change the Height then the Width will adjust
automatically so the ratio of the width to height
remains the same as the original ration; similarly, if you
change the Width the Height setting will also adjust
automatically at the same ratio.
Important
z The Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height is not
available when Borderless Printing Size is selected.

TOP
Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

Note
z You can define up to 50 custom sizes for media.
z The settings in the Media Size Options dialog box
remain in effect even after the software application is
closed.
z To delete a registered custom size, from the Media
Size List select the name of the custom size to delete,
then click the Delete button.
z To edit a registered custom size, from the Media Size
List, select the name of the custom size, then change
the Width and Height settings, then click the Register
button.
z The standard sizes (marked with a red dot on the left),
or sizes that you defined with another printer driver
(marked with a white dot on the left), can be neither
edited nor deleted.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 54

Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

Selecting a Media Display Series
You can select a size series for Display Series that will
display for the Media Size and Page Size on the Page
Setup sheet in the Media Size Options dialog box.
To select a display series to display for the Page Size
and Media Size in the Page Setup sheet, in the Media
Size Options dialog box select the Display Series that
you want to use. Also, if you want to cancel a size series
selected for display, just click and cancel the Display
Series selection.

Note
z If you select an oversize for the Display Series then
Oversize will display in front of the media name as
shown below. For example, if the page size selection is
ISO A4 then Oversize - ISO A4 is displayed.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

z When you see Oversize - prefixed to a page size, you
can print documents and images with the specified
sizes as shown below. However, when you apply this
function to print you must set a media size large
enough to accommodate the page size plus the extra
white space. You cannot perform oversize printing
using a custom size document, an media size selected
for borderless printing, or media size that is too large
to feed with this printer.
Original Data
to Print

Original Size
Data

3- 55

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Print Results

Size of Media to
Load in the Printer

Original Size
+
Size
of Margins

Original
Size

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

TOP

When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean

Software Provided for Windows

How to Set the Media Type

The following software applications are provided for use
with Windows.

You can use the printer operation panel to perform suitable settings for ink drying time of each media and other
features. These settings can also adjusted with the items
in the Media Detailed Settings dialog box in the printer
driver. If the printouts are not clear, you may be able to
correct the problem by adjusting the settings in this dialog box.
To open the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, in the
printer driver open the Main sheet and then in the lower
right corner of the Media Type group box click the Settings... button.
For more details about the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, please refer to the online Help.

The function of each software application is described
below.

Basic Software for Printing
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver 2005
This is a software application that required for the
printer to print. This must be installed on every
computer that will use the printer. The printer driver not
only allows the printer to print, the driver also provides
many other important functions such as enlargement/
reduction, borderless printing, color adjustment,
multiple copy printing, and others. This can be used
with Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows
2000, Windows NT 4.0, Windows Me, and Windows
98.
The printer driver is on the provided User W6400
Software CD-ROM. (→ Quick Start Guide)

Displaying the Printer Status

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

GARO Status Monitor
This utility software is used with Windows to display
the details about printer errors on the computer
screen. This can be used with Windows Server 2003,
Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows Me, and Windows 98.
This is provided on the W6400 User Software CDROM and it is installed automatically with the printer
driver.

3- 56

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Using the Printer on a Network
LPR Port
This software must be installed on Windows Me or
Windows 98 so the computer can use the printer on a
network with TCP/IP.
To install this software, use the Setup Menu of the
W6400 User Software CD-ROM to start the dynamic
installation for both the printer and this software.

GARO Device Setup Utility
The software application for Windows that allows you
to use the computer to set up the network information
for the printer.
(→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network
Environment”)

Remote UI
The function that allows you to use a Web browser on
a networked computer to display the status of the
printer and to set up and delete print jobs. This utility is
built into the network interface of this printer.
(→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network
Environment”)

NetSpot Console
This software allows you to use a Web browser on a
computer connected to a network to display the status
of the printer and perform printer and network settings
for a server running with Windows Server 2003,
Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows Me, and Windows 98. You can download
NetSpot Console free of charge from the Canon home
page (http://canon.jp/). Install as required on the
server computer.

3- 57

TOP
Device Status Extension
If printer sharing is performed where IIS is installed on
Windows XP or Windows 2000 you can use your Web
Browser to display information about shared printers
and manage print jobs. By installing Device Status
Extension on Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, or
Windows 2000, the screens that display printer
information for printers that support Device Status
Extension can be replaced with the screens provided
by Canon. Further, if you use NetSpot Console, you
can start NetSpot Console from the Device Status
Extension screen to perform printer and other settings.
Device Status Extension is stored on the provided
W6400 User Software CD-ROM. For more details
about how to install and use this software, please refer
to the Readme.txt file in the DSE folder.

Creating Posters Easily
PosterArtist
The software provides a wizard that helps you create
posters simply, and guides you from creation through
printing. Original image for a poster can be created
freely in a software application regardless of the print
settings performed in the printer driver. Also,
borderless printing and banner size posters can be
created easily. Posters created with PosterArtist can
be printed only on this printer.
It can be used with Japanese Windows XP, Windows
2000, Windows Me, and Windows 98 SE.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Windows

Printing Beautiful Photographs
Digital Photo Print Pro
This software allows you to easily take a photo image
captured with a digital camera, enlarge it, and then
print it without borders. You can also easily adjust
color brightness and contrast, eliminate the effects of
red-eye and moiré in photo images, and correct
subject back light. Also, you can use one of the
templates provided to easily print and original calendar
or create a list of images with text entered. This
software application requires Windows XP or
Windows 2000.

Printing Beautiful Digital Camera Images
(for the Professional)
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop
(hereafter "Print Plug-In) makes it possible to
reproduce and print the vivid RGB color of Adobe
created in PhotoShop. This software is intended for
professionals and high-end users who want to obtain
the best finished color hues.
After installation of Print Plug-In, you can view a
Preview within PhotoShop that allows you to confirm
how faithful the colors are reproduced and then adjust
them. Because you can process RGB 16-bit data just
as it is with PhotoShop, you can print without losing
the high color gradations of the originals. Also, you
can save the used settings so when you want to print
with the same settings you only have to open and read
that information to print again.
(→ Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide)

3- 58

TOP
Printing Images Created with CAD
Systems
Canon imagePROGRAF HDI Printer Driver
The Canon imagePROGRAF HDI printer driver is
dedicated to printing accurate, clean images created
with AutoCAD CAD software. Normal print jobs sent
through the Windows printer driver may show some
loss of precision in printing fine lines, but the Canon
imagePROFGRAF HDI driver communicates with the
printer directly from the computer, processes data with
its own internal commands and delivers superior
reproduction of lines in printing that preserves the
accuracy of the originals.
(→ HDI Driver Guide)

Select the Media Type
Media Configuration Tool
Media Configuration Tool is the software used to
register information about print media (paper, film,
etc.) that can be used with the printer as it becomes
available. The functions of this software are provided
for users who have an in-depth knowledge of printers
and print media.
You an use this software to upload and download
media information to and from the printer about media
names, thickness, printhead height, suction fan
strength, default margins, and other information. A
function is also provided that allows the user to
acquire the most recent information about media for
printing when using the printer connected to a
network.
(→ Media Configuration Tool Guide)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Printing from Macintosh
This printer driver provides a variety of printer functions to meet your printing needs. In this chapter we will introduce these
functions.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Before You Begin
There are some functions you should remember and use when you use this printer. Before you use the printer for different
printing tasks, please read this section.

Basic Settings to Meet Your Needs (Original Type)
To achieve the best printing, you must adjust the color and other settings for the objective of the document. This printer
driver provides superior settings frequently used to produce posters, POP ads, digital camera prints, CAD designs, and
other prints. Just select from the list the type of document you need and perform the basic procedure for the print job.
The following applications are provided for the types of prints shown below.
Types of Documents

3- 59

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Content

Paper Type

Setting Values
Print
Matching
Quality
Method

Standard

Best for printing normal
documents, with text, images,
graphics, etc. mixed together.

Plain Paper

POP

Best for printing mixed text
and illustrations with bright
and forceful eyecatching such
as store posters.

Heavyweight Coated
Paper

Standard

Poster

Best for printing posters with
centered photographs.

Proofing Paper *1
Heavyweight Coated
Paper *2

Standard

Photo
(from digital
camera)

Best for printing photos
captured with a digital camera.

Glossy Photo Paper *1
Heavyweight Coated
Paper *2

Perceptual
Standard
(OS X)
Auto (OS 8/9)

Standard

Color
Adjustment

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Default

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Saturation

Contrast: +5

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Automatic

Contrast: +10
Brightness: +5

Perceptual

Contrast: +10
Brightness: +5

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

Types of Documents

トップ
TOP
Content

Paper Type

Photo (from
scanner)

Best for reproduction of
scanned photographs with
color faithful to the quality of
the original.

Glossy Photo Paper *1
Heavyweight Coated
Paper *2

Long Format
(Banner)

Best for long banner formats
(vertical and horizontal) with
mixed illustrations and text.

Heavyweight Coated
Paper

CAD

Best for plans and design
drawings with fine lines.

No color
correction

Prints giving priority to and
using the software application
setting for color matching

CAD Plain Paper

Plain Paper

Setting Values
Print
Matching
Quality
Method
Standard Colorimetric

Standard

Saturation

Matching
Standard
Mode
No Correction

Color
Adjustment

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Default

Contrast: +10
Saturation: +5

Default

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

*1. Photo Black Ink (BK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer.
*2. Matte Black Ink (MBK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Note
z For more details about print quality, please refer to “Custom Print Quality” in “Customizing Print Quality”. (→ P.3-103)
z For more details about color mode matching and color adjustments, please refer to “Fine Adjusting Color for Printing” in
“Adjusting Color” (→ P.3-107) see “Color Matching”. (→ P.3-113)

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 60

Index

Printing from Macintosh

To perform the settings for a print, first open the Main panel of the printer driver and then from Print Preferences select
the type of printing that you want to perform.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Note
z The Profiles function is also provided with OS 8/9 so you can register your own frequently used print settings. You can
use Add Profile and Edit Profile to further simply printer settings.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 61

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Printer Driver Settings at a Glance (Media Preview)
The preview illustrates the content of the current printer driver settings. If you change the page size and orientation, feed
method, etc., you can confirm their immediate effect easily by viewing the effect of the new settings in the Preview image.
You can confirm the following items in the Preview.
When you select the Images tab, the contents of the media size and layout are displayed.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

3- 62

Setting Preview Description
The following settings are shown in the Preview image.
(OS X) :Page Size, Orientation, Scaling, Page Layout, Color Mode, Borderless Printing
(OS 8/9) :Page Size, Media Size, Orientation, Scaling, Page Layout, Poster Printing, Color Mode, Mirror,
Rotate 180 degrees, Borderless Printing

This displays the sizes of the Page Size and Media Size settings. Also, when the Enlarged/Reduced Printing
and Borderless Printing items are selected, the mode and magnification are also displayed.

The following settings are shown in the Preview image.
:Media Source, Automatic Cutting, Print Centered, Banner Printing, Media Source, Fit Roll Paper Width, No
Spaces at Top or Bottom, Rotate Paper 90 degrees, Orientation, Borderless Printing, Rotate 180 degrees,
Mirror.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

When you select the Size tab, the details about the media size are displayed.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 63

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)
There is one more function that can be displayed for the print image of the document in the Preview. This other image is
called the Print Preview. Open the Preview before you print, so you can avoid failed print jobs beforehand.
To display the Print Preview, click the Preview button in the printer driver.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

When the Viewer starts you can visually check the Preview display.
Once you have confirmed that the image layout on the media is correct, you can print from the Preview screen.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 64

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Enlarging and Reducing the Original
The original can be printed at a larger or smaller size.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

There are three methods for enlargement and reduction.

z Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the Size of the Media. (→ P.3-65)
z Enlarging or reducing fit the roll paper width. (→ P.3-69)
z Setting the desired Scaling rate and printing. (→ P.3-73)

Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the Size of the Media
By setting the size of the media actually loaded for printing, you can automatically enlarge or reduce the print automatically to match the size of the loaded media.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
3- 65

In the software application select Page Setup from the File menu to open the Page Setup dialog
box.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

For Media Size (Page Size for OS 8/9), select the size of the media.
Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Contents

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select the Finishing panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9).
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Confirm that the size of the original created in the software application is selected under Page Size.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 66

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 67

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Confirm that Fit Media Size is selected under Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

For Media Size select the size of the media that will be used for printing.

Note
z Match Page Size is selected as the default.
Important
z If the landscape or portrait orientation of the original page size and the print media are different, part of the image may
not print on the media.

Confirm the content of the Preview, then click the Print button.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

The print job starts.

3- 68

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width
You can enlarge or reduce the entire size of the original so it fits the width of the roll.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

1
2
3
4

In the software application select Page Setup from the File menu to open the Page Setup dialog
box.
For Media Size (Page Size for OS 8/9), select the size of the media.
Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.
From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 69

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select the Finishing panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9).
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Confirm that the size of the original created in the software application is selected under Page Size.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 70

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9).

Important
z If Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is selected on the Finishing panel, this function cannot be used.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 71

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Note
z Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9) to change the width
setting for Media Size. Check the value displayed for Roll Paper Width.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Confirm the content of the Preview, then click the Print button.
The print job starts.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 72

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Selecting the Magnification Rate for Printing
You can enter the rate of magnification directly if you need to scale the enlargement or reduction for a desired effect.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

1
2
3
4

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 73

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select the Finishing panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9).
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Confirm that the size of the original created in the software application is selected under Page Size.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 74

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 75

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Scaling then specify the desired setting.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Important
z This function cannot be used when Borderless Printing is selected.
z You can enter a setting for the rate of magnification manually from the keyboard or use the arrow button on the right to
scroll the number settings up or down. The rate can be changed in increments of 1%. The size can be scaled in the
range limited by the size of the scaling entry column displayed on the right.
z You can perform a setting that is larger than the size of the media loaded in the printer, but some portions will be cut off
and not printed.
z To center an image in the upper left for printing, on the Finishing panel select Print Centered.

9
10

Check the value displayed for Media Size.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button.
The print job starts.

3- 76

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Index

Printing from Macintosh

TOP

Settings Required for Borderless Printing
Before performing the print job, make sure that a media
that can be used for borderless printing is loaded. Only
media fed from the roll can be used for borderless printing on this printer.
Here is a list of the types of roll media and their widths
that can be used for borderless printing.
Paper Type
Heavyweight Coated Paper,
Premium Matte Paper, Extra
Heavyweight Coated Paper,
Glossy Photo Paper, SemiGlos
Photo Paper, Heavyweight
Glossy Photo Paper,
Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo,
Flame Resistant-Cloth, Fine Art
Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight
Photo, Fine Art Textured,
Canvas SemiGlos, Special 1-5

3- 77

Corresponding Roll Width
10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
14-in. Roll (355.6mm)
16-in Roll (355.6 mm)
24-in. Roll (609.6mm)
JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0 mm)
ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm)

Important
z Paper of types and roll widths other than those listed
above cannot be used for borderless printing.
z The following types of media cannot be cut and are
printed left to right during borderless printing.
Fine Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art
Textured, Canvas Matte

When you perform borderless printing, be sure to select
Enlarged/Reduced Printing on the Finishing panel
(Page Setup for OS 8/9). This allows Borderless Printing to be performed.

Important
z Borderless Printing cannot be performed under the
following conditions.
When Cut Sheet is selected under Media Source on
the Finishing panel.
When Roll Paper (Banner Printing) is selected
under Media Source on the Finishing panel.
When Scaling is selected for Enlarged/Reduced
Printing.
When Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is
selected on the Finishing panel.
When several pages are selected for Pages per
Sheet (Page Layout for OS 8/9) on the Layout
panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

When Print Centered is selected on the Finishing
panel
When the setting selected for Roll Paper Width does
not support borderless printing

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Borderless Printing
This section describes the borderless printing procedure.

Create the original in the software application so it matches the size of the media used for printing.

Important
z The following page size settings can be used for borderless printing. Refer to the table below when you create the
original image and set the page for a size that can be used for borderless printing.
z If the media size was pre-selected in the software application, the selected size must support Borderless Printing.
Borderless printing on media the
same size as the original
document

ISO A1, ISO A2, JIS B2, JIS B3, ANSI Legal, ARCH D, ARCH C, 20”x24”,
14”x17”, 10”x12”, 10”x15”, 8”x10”, US Photo (16”x20”)

Borderless printing with
enlargement and reduction

All page sizes

Note
z Make sure the image created for borderless printing covers the entire original page.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 78

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Open the Main panel and perform the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Select the media
compatible with
borderless printing.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Open the Finishing panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9) and then select Enlarged/Reduced Printing
and Borderless Printing.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 79

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Note
z When Borderless Printing is selected under the Media Size in the software application, Step 4 to Step 6 are not
required.
z If you select Enlarged/Reduced Printing with Borderless Printing, Fit Roll Paper Width is selected for Enlarged/
Reduced Printing.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 80

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Confirm that Fit Media Size is selected under Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

6
7

Select the Media Size setting that you want.
Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button.
The print job starts.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 81

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Note
z For more about how to enlarge or reduce while
performing borderless printing, please refer to
“Enlarge/Reduce to fit Roll Paper Width” under “”. (→ P.3-83).
z If Scale to fit the Page Size is selected for borderless
printing, the printer driver automatically enlarges the
original by 3 mm at the top, bottom, left, and right margin.
The result is the printer fills the margins on the entire
page with borderless printing.
The top, bottom, left and right margins of the original
are set to 3 mm so no part of the image will extend
beyond a margin.
z To perform a borderless print of an image with a top and bottom margin, on the Finishing panel you can select No
Spaces at Top or Bottom (this is an easy way to perform a borderless print by setting these margins to zero). For
more details, please refer to “Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper)”. (→ P.3-100)

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 82

Index

Printing from Macintosh

TOP

z Enlarge/Reduce to fit Roll Paper Width
Enlarges or reduces the width of the original for printing so it will fit the width of the roll. You can print a page
size not compatible with borderless printing (A4, A3,
Custom Size, etc.) on roll media of a width that is compatible with enlargement/reduction printing.

1
2
3

Create the original in the software application so it matches the size of the media used for printing.
From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Open the Main panel and perform the settings for borderless printing.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Select the media
compatible with
borderless printing.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 83

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Open the Finishing (Page Setup for OS 8/9) and then select Enlarged/Reduced Printing and
Borderless Printing.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z If you select Enlarged/Reduced Printing with Borderless Printing, Fit Roll Paper Width is selected for Enlarged/
Reduced Printing.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 84

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9).
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

6
7

Roll Width Size is displayed in Media Size, so check the value for Roll Paper Width.
Confirm the content of the Preview, then click the Print button.
The print job starts.

Note
z After the Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9) feature automatically sizes to original to fit the width of
the roll, the printer driver automatically enlarges the image so that each margin, that is, the top, bottom, left, and right
margin, is 3 mm each. The result is the printer fills the entire page up to the edges with borderless printing. Portions of
the image that protrude over the 3 mm top, bottom, right, and left margins of the original document cannot be printed.

3- 85

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper)
In cases where the length of the print job data is shorter than the width of the media, the printer driver will rotate the image
90 degrees and the length of the image across the width of the media. By rotating the image you can maximize the use of
the media and reduce waste.
If you do this setting in the printer to rotate the page image, then the page is rotated automatically for the print job. The
image will not be rotated if it would not fit after rotation.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Important
z Confirm that the Roll Paper Width setting is correct for the media loaded in the printer.
z If the selection for the media source is not Roll Paper, or if borderless printing is selected, this function cannot be used.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 86

Index

Printing from Macintosh

1
2

トップ
TOP

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Select the Finishing panel.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 87

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select Rotate Page 90 degrees.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The print job starts.

Note
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm the appearance of the original in the Print Preview before printing.
For more details about how to display the Preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)” in
“Before You Begin”. (→ P.3-64)

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 88

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Printing Several Pages on One Sheet
(Page Layout)
You can print from 2 to 16 pages with reduced sizes on one
sheet. For example, if you have a document with a large
number of pages you can print two pages per sheet and the
number of pages will be one-half. Also, you can perform
more detailed settings, such as selecting the arrangement
of the pages on the sheet and specifying whether to print
each page with a border line.

1
2

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Select the Layout panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9).

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 89

Index

Printing from Macintosh

From the Pages per Sheet (Page Layout
for OS 8/9) list, select the Page Layout that
you want to use for printing.

TOP
Set the Layout Direction to arrange the
pages on the media.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 90

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Select a borderline from the Page Border
list.

TOP
Confirm the content of the preview, then click
the Print button.
The print job starts.

Note
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview
before printing. For more details about how to display
the Preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-64)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 91

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Printing Posters (Page Layout)
After the image is enlarged and divided into several
sections, you can print the print the sections and paste
them together to assemble one large poster.

Note
z This function is not provided for OS X.

1
2

TOP
From the File menu of the software
application select Print to display the Print
dialog box.
Select the Page Setup panel.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 92

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Click the Page Layout checkbox on and
select Poster (2x2) from the list.
In the Preview confirm the appearance of the image
of the selected page layout.

TOP
If you do not need to print one of the panels
of the divided image, click the Pages to
Print checkbox to remove the checkmark for
the panel that you do not want to print.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z The pages selected for printing are displayed in the
print image Preview and the pages that have not
selected for printing are not displayed.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 93

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Confirm the content of the Preview, then
click the Print button.
The print job starts.

Note
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview
before printing. For more details about how to display
the Preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. (→ P.364)

TOP
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing
(Long Prints)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Matching the Width of the Roll
Once you become familiar with fitting images to the full
width of the roll with your software application, it is very
easy to print vertical and horizontal banners.
Here we will describe as an example how to take a 250
mm x 600 mm original and enlarge to fit a 24” roll
(approximately 610 mm wide), and then print it as a banner (600 mm x 1,440 mm).

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Note
z With this printer you can print a banner up to 18,000
mm maximum length (2,774 mm with OS 8/9).

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 94

Index

Printing from Macintosh

1
2

Start the software application.
From the File menu select Page Setup to
open the Page Setup dialog box.

TOP
Set the Format for (OS 8/9 does not have
this setting).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 95

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Select Custom Paper Size (Media Design
for OS 8/9).

TOP
Click the New button then define the media
name and size (for OS 8/9, define the media
name and size then click Add button).

Note
z Enter Poster here for the name of the media.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

6
3- 96

Contents
Click the Save button (this step is not
required with OS 8/9).

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Select the Page Attribute panel.

Note
z Once you have registered the size in the Custom
Paper Size panel (Media Design for OS 8/9), the size
settings are stored under the specified name and the
name is displayed in the list. For more details about
the Custom Paper Size panel (Media Design panel
for OS 8/9), see “Custom Sizes (User Print Settings)”.
(→ P.3-121)

Select the media defined with custom settings.

a For Page Size on the Custom Paper Size (Media
Design for OS 8/9) panel, select the name of the
user defined custom settings.

TOP
b For the banner select Orientation, select the
Landscape icon, click the OK button to close the
Page Setup dialog box.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 97

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Create the original in the software application.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

10
11

After the original is created, from the File menu select Print to open the Print dialog box.
When the Main panel displays, select Long Format (Banner) for the Print Preferences for the long
print.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 98

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Display the Finishing (Page Setup for OS 8/9) panel and select Enlarged/Reduced Printing and
Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9) for the long print.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The print job starts.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 99

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper)
The white space in the top and bottom margins can be eliminated for printing to save paper. The printer does not feed the
white space in the margins to save paper. This function can be used only when Roll Paper is selected as the media source.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Note
z You use this method during borderless printing as shown in the illustration below.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Important
z This function cannot be used when Banner is selected as the media source.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 100

Index

Printing from Macintosh

1
2

トップ
TOP

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Select the Finishing panel.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 101

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select No Spaces at Top or Bottom.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The print job starts.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 102

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Custom Print Quality
Customizing Print Quality
When you need to frequently perform combined settings for print quality and print speed, you can select Custom Settings under Print Quality and then perform the print quality and resolution settings in the Custom Settings dialog box
according to the requirements of your requirements.

1
2

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Confirm that the Main panel is displayed.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 103

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

From the Print Quality list, select Custom Settings.
A Set button appears in the lower right corner of the Print Quality group.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Click the Set button in the Print Quality group to open the Custom Settings dialog box.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 104

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

From the Print Quality list, select the quality settings.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Note
z The print quality settings that you can select for the custom settings are described below.
Print Quality
Highest
High
Standard
Draft

Content
Prioritizes attaining the highest image quality for printing.
Prioritizes attaining high image quality for printing.
Attains a stable image at an average printing speed.
Prioritizes high printing speed but you should check layout and other aspects of the
image after printing.

Important
z The items of that are available for selection the print Quality may differ depending on which print media are used. Here
is a list of the media where Highest under Print Quality is available.
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo, SemiGlos Photo Paper, Glossy Photo Paper
z If one of the types of media below is selected, Draft cannot be selected under Print Quality.
Premium Matte Paper, Glossy Photo Paper, SemiGlos Photo, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo, Synthetic Paper, Adhesive Synthetic Paper, Backlit Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Japanese Paper Washi,
CAD Translucent Matte Film

3- 105

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Confirm the resolution.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Important
z The resolution is set automatically depending on which print quality item is selected as shown below. If you need to
change the resolution you can perform so with the setting under Print Quality.
Print Quality

Resolution

Content

Highest, High

Fine
(600 dpi)

Print speed is slower due to the higher resolution setting. Achieves the best printing
results, but printing time is longer and a large amount of computer memory is
required.

Standard, Draft

Quick
(300 dpi)

Print speed is faster due to the lower resolution setting. Printing time is shorter and
not as much computer memory is required.

Click the OK button to close the Custom Settings dialog box.

Note
z In OS 8/9 if you select Enhance Text With Photos in the Custom Settings dialog box then when you have text mixed
with photos or graphic data, the resolution of the text will be raised (this function is not available for OS X).
z Only the Halftones and Error Diffusion custom settings can be set. Error diffusion arranges non-standard pixels and
displays them as gradations (halftones). This setting is ideal for photographs or graphic images that require printing
with fine gradations.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 106

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Fine Adjusting Color for Printing
Adjusting Color
Basically the color settings of the software application have priority, but if the results of a print job are not what you want
you can also adjust color in the printer driver.
You can also take color photos captured with a scanner or a digital camera, or any other color image, and print them in
monochrome.
Now we will describe the color adjustments.

1
2

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Confirm that the Main panel is displayed.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 107

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

On the Main panel select Color Mode then Color.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z Color Mode presents these following items for selection.
Color Mode

3- 108

Content

Color

Prints in color.

Monochrome
(Photo):

Provides stable monochrome photo printing with minimal tone change and enables detailed
adjustment of gray scale gradations and color tones.

Monochrome

Prints in monochrome.

Solid Color

Prints with only a limited number of colors. Use this setting when you need fine lines with light
colors in a sharp image.

Black Only

All colors other than white are printed black.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

Important
z Monochrome (Photo) can be selected for Color Mode only if one of the following types of paper is selected:
Glossy Photo Paper/Semi-Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo
Paper/Fine Art Photo/Fine Art Heavyweight Photo/Fine Art Textured/Japanese Paper Washi

Press the Set button.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Note
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color, Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for Color
Mode.

3- 109

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Confirm that the Color Adjustment panel is displayed, then click the Object Adjustment button.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

The Object Adjustment dialog box opens.

Contents

Note
z This function is not provided for OS X, Step 6 to Step 8 are not required.

3- 110

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Select the item that you want to adjust: Images, Graphics, or Text.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Note
z Note that for this printer driver all the items (Images, Graphics, Text) are selected as the default settings.

8
9

Click the OK button to close the Object Adjustment dialog box.
Drag the slide bar to the left or right for the item that you want to adjust. You can also enter the value
directly or use the arrows of the spinbox to raise or lower the value.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 111

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Note
z The Color Adjustment panel presents the following items for selection.
Color Adjustment

Content

You can calibrate the hues for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Brightness

Adjusts brightness from the darkest to brightest colors so none are lost in the brightness of the
printed image.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Contrast

Adjusts the relative contrast from brightest to darkest colors.

Saturation

Adjusts the vividness of colors from dull to extremely vivid.

Gray Tone
Adjustment

Adjusts grayscale from cool colors (blue tones) to warm colors (red tones).

Cyan
Magenta
Yellow

Important
z As you change each item on the panel, the image of the Preview on the left changes to reflect the adjustment. The
Original shows the appearance of the initial settings, and the Preview reflects the current settings.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Click the OK button to close the Color Settings dialog box.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 112

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Color Matching
When you print an image captured with a scanner or a digital camera, sometimes the appearance of the printout does not
match what you see on the screen.
This is caused by differences between the display color and the printed color. In the Color Settings dialog box you can
use the items on the Matching panel, that is, select an ICC (International Color Consortium) color profile, or select a
matching mode or input profile, or printer profile settings, to have the hues of the colors on the screen more closely
resemble the colors in the printout.

1
2

From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
Confirm that the Main panel is displayed.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 113

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

On the Main panel select Color Mode then Color.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z Color Mode presents these following items for selection.
Color Mode

3- 114

Content

Color

Prints in color.

Monochrome
(Photo):

Provides stable monochrome photo printing with minimal tone change and enables detailed
adjustment of gray scale gradations and color tones.

Monochrome

Prints in monochrome.

Solid Color

Prints with only a limited number of colors. Use this setting when you need fine lines with light
colors in a sharp image.

Black Only

All colors other than white are printed black.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

Important
z Monochrome (Photo) can be selected for Color Mode only if one of the following types of paper is selected:
Glossy Photo Paper/Semi-Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo
Paper/Fine Art Photo/Fine Art Heavyweight Photo/Fine Art Textured/Japanese Paper Washi

Press the Set button.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Note
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color, Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for Color
Mode.

3- 115

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Select the Matching panel.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 116

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

From the Mode list, select the matching mode.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Note
z Here is a list of the available matching modes.
Matching Mode

3- 117

Content

Driver Correction

Calibrates color using the original color profile of the printer driver.

ICC Correction

Calibrates the color in the printer driver using the standards of ICC color profiles. When this
mode is selected, this specifies the entry profile and printer profile.

ColorSync

Select for correction the color management system provided with the Mac OS. When this
mode is selected, this specifies the printer profile.

No Correction

Does not execute color matching. The color matching is performed in the software application
or performed by an independent color profile; select when you want the color matching of the
printer driver to be ignored.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

Important
z The mode you select for the Mode affects what items are available for selection.
z If you select the Driver Correction, only the Matching Method is available for selection.
z For OS 8/9, If you select ICC Correction you can adjust Images, Graphics and Text for the Matching Method. Also,
if you select Use Common Input Profile for All Objects, then the Images, Graphics, and Text all apply to one profile
(this function is not available for OS X).

When ICC Correction is selected for the Mode, at Images under Input Profile Settings select a
profile from the Input Profile list.

Note
z When Use Common Input Profile for All Objects is selected, the same input profile is selected automatically for both
Graphics and Text.
z If you want to perform different settings for Graphics and Text, then you must cancel the selection of Use Common
Input Profile for All Objects.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 118

Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

Click the input profile Matching Method list and select a matching method.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Note
z Matching Method presents the following items for selection.
Matching Method
Auto

3- 119

Content
Makes the best matching selections for the Image, Graphics, and
Text items.
*Not provided for OS X.
*This item can selected only when Driver Correction or ColorSync
is selected.

Perceptual

Achieves the best results with priority on color perceptual.

Saturation

Achieves the best results with priority on color saturation.

Colorimetric

Faithfully reproduces the input data. Performs white color
calibration, so there is no color when white data is output.

Absolute Colorimetric

Faithfully reproduces the input data. No white point correction is
done.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

トップ
TOP

From the Printer Profile Settings list, select a printer profile.

Important
z A print profile can be selected only when ICC Correction or ColorSync is selected under the Mode.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Click the OK button to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 120

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Custom Sizes (User Print Settings)
Creating Custom Sizes
In the software application you can define original media
sizes and save them. Once a custom size has been
defined, it will be listed along with the standard sizes and
be available for selection.

Select Page Setup from the File menu.

Note
z The setup method is different for some software
applications.

TOP
The Page Setup dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 121

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Set the Format for (OS 8/9 does not have
this setting).

TOP
Select Custom Paper Size (Media Design
for OS 8/9).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 122

Index

Printing from Macintosh

TOP

Click the New button to define the user
defined name, the media size and margins
(for OS 8/9 click, define the user defined
name, media size and other settings, then
click the Add button).

Note
z When you select the desired size and name from the
Media Size list on the left, the Width (Wid. for OS 8/9)
and Length (Hght for OS 8/9) are entered
automatically.
z For OS 8/9, If Borderless Printing is selected, the
selection for Wid. changes automatically to a roll width
list that supports borderless printing. Select a Wid.
setting for the width of the desired roll, then enter a
number for the Hght that you want. (This function is
not provided for OS X.)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

6
7

Click the Save button. (Not required for OS
8/9)
Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

Note
z If you are using OS 8/9 you are allowed to store up to a
maximum of 5 custom settings.
z The settings in the Custom Paper Size panel (Media
Design for OS 8/9) box remain in effect even after the
software application is closed.
z To delete a registered custom size, select the name of
the custom size to delete, then click the Delete button.
z To edit a registered custom size, select the name of
the custom size, then input the Width and Height
settings again. (this editing and correction cannot be
performed for OS 8/9)

3- 123

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

TOP

Selecting a Media Display Series
In Display Series on the Media Design panel, you can
select a display series that will display for the Page Size
on the Page Attribute panel and for Media Size in the
Print dialog box.

Note
z This function is not provided for OS X.
To display a paper size series for selection for Media
Size in the Print dialog box, or for Page Size on the
Page Attribute panel, you must select Display Series
with a check mark on the Media Design panel. Also, if
you want to cancel a size series selected for display, just
click check box to remove the check mark for the Display Series selection.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 124

Index

Printing from Macintosh

When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean
How to Set the Media Type
You can use the printer operation panel to perform suitable settings for the ink drying time of each media and other features. These settings can also adjusted with the items in the Media Detailed Settings dialog box in the printer driver. If
the printouts are not clear, you may be able to correct the problem by adjusting the settings in this dialog box.
For more details about the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, please refer to the online Help.

トップ
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 125

Index

Printing from Macintosh

Software Provided for Macintosh
The following software applications are provided for use
with Macintosh.
The function of each software application is described
below.

Basic Software for Printing
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver 2005
This is a software application that required for the
printer to print. This must be installed on every
computer that will use the printer. The printer driver not
only allows the printer to print, the driver also provides
many other important functions such as enlargement/
reduction, borderless printing, color adjustment,
multiple copy printing, and others.
The printer driver is stored on the provided User
Software CD-ROM for Mac OS 8.6/9.x and Mac OS X.

Displaying the Printer Status
GARO Printmonitor
This is the utility software that displays details about
printer errors on the Macintosh. This utility is installed
together with the printer driver.

3- 126

TOP
Using the Printer on a Network
Remote UI
This software is used to set up the network
information, display the status of the printer, delete
print jobs, and display the print job history. This
software is stored in the printer ROM, and settings are
performed from the computer with a Web browser
over the network using a specified printer IP address.
(→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network
Environment”)
If you use a Remote UI, you must set the IP address in
the printer.

Printing Beautiful Digital Camera Images
(for the Professional)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop
(hereafter "Print Plug-In) makes it possible to
reproduce and print the vivid RGB color of Adobe
created in PhotoShop. This software is intended for
professionals and high-end users who want to obtain
the best finished color hues.
After installation of Print Plug-In, you can view a
Preview within PhotoShop that allows you to confirm
how faithful the colors are reproduced and then adjust
them. Because you can process RGB 16-bit data just
as it is with PhotoShop, you can print without losing
the high color gradations of the originals. Also, you
can save the used settings so when you want to print
with the same settings you only have to open and read
that information to print again.
(→ Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide)

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing from Macintosh

TOP

Important
z If you are using the Remote UI with Mac OS 8.6/9.x,
open TCP/IP on the Control Panel and make sure
that Built-in Ethernet is selected for the Connect via.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

3- 127

Index

TOP

Chapter 4 Maintaining the Printer
Click on the checkbox to print the section contents.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Replacing Ink Tanks ...................................................................................4-2

How to Confirm Ink Levels ..................................................................................... 4-2
When to Replace an Ink Tank ............................................................................... 4-3
Ink Tank Handling Precautions .............................................................................. 4-4
Replacing an Ink Tank ........................................................................................... 4-5

Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer ..........................4-8

Switching the Ink Level Detection Function Off ..................................................... 4-8
Executing a Print Job ............................................................................................. 4-9

Cleaning the Printer ..................................................................................4-10

Cleaning the Exterior Covers ............................................................................... 4-10
Cleaning Inside the Upper Cover ........................................................................ 4-11

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Cleaning the Paper Restraint ...................................................................4-14
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ......................................................4-16

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Replacing the Printhead ...........................................................................4-23

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Checking Spacing Remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge .............................. 4-16
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ...................................................... 4-17
Maintenance Cartridge Handling Precautions ..................................................... 4-18
Maintenance Cartridge Replacement Procedure ................................................ 4-18
Printhead Handling Precautions .......................................................................... 4-23
How to Replace the Printhead ............................................................................. 4-24

Replacing the Cutter Blade ......................................................................4-29
Transporting the Printer ............................................................................4-32
Checking the Condition of the Printer .......................................................4-36
Cleaning the Printhead .............................................................................4-38

Types of Printhead Cleaning ............................................................................... 4-38
Printhead Cleaning Procedures ........................................................................... 4-38

Aligning the Printhead ..............................................................................4-40
Adjusting Amount of Media Feed .............................................................4-42

Media Feed Adjustment Procedure ..................................................................... 4-42
Adjusting Line Feed Manually ............................................................................. 4-43

Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust ......................................................4-45
Changing the Black Ink Type ...................................................................4-47

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Black Ink Tank Exchange Procedure .................................................................. 4-48

4- 1

How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages

Start Print → Before clicking the Start Print button

Index

Replacing Ink Tanks

TOP

Replacing Ink Tanks
When the supply of ink in an ink tank runs low, a message
appears on the operation panel display or on the printer
driver screen to tell you that it is time to replace the ink tank.
You can change any one of the ink tanks among the seven
when it runs out of ink: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Photo
Magenta (PM), Cyan (C), Photo Cyan (PC), Photo Black
(BK), and Matte Black (MBK).

How to Confirm Ink Levels
You can confirm the ink level at any time by checking the
printer operation panel display. You should always check
the ink levels in the ink tanks and replace any ink tank that
is low before starting a long print job or any other job that
will consume a large amount of ink.

Online Status Display

z Yellow Ink
z Magenta Ink
z Photo Magenta Ink
z Cyan Ink
z Photo Cyan Ink
z Photo Black Ink
z Matte Black Ink

BCI-1451Y
BCI-1431M
BCI-1431PM
BCI-1431C
BCI-1431PC
BCI-1431BK
BCI-1451MBK

Online
Bk

The ink levels are displayed in the bottom line of the display from left to right in the following order: Black (K),
Photo Cyan (PC), Cyan (C), Photo Magenta (PM),
Magenta (M), Yellow (Y).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 2

Index

Replacing Ink Tanks

TOP

Information Button Display
Information Power

Ink
Cleaning

You can check the ink level at any time (during a print job
or while an error is displayed) by pressing the Information button. The ink levels are displayed from left to right
in the following order: Black (K), Photo Cyan (PC), Cyan
(C), Photo Magenta (PM), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y).

How to Read the Ink Level Display
The height of a small graphic indicates the ink level in
each tank.

100%
80%
60%
40%
(100~90%) (90~70%) (70~50%) (50~30%)

20%
0%
(30~6.9%) (6.9~0%)

When to Replace an Ink Tank
You should have extra ink tanks on hand ready for
replacement when either of the conditions below occurs.

Important
z An ink tank cannot be replaced during printing
because the right cover is locked.
z The printed image may become uneven if the printer is
stopped during a print job to replace an ink tank.
z Never open the right cover or operate the release lever
while the Initializing message is displayed. This could
damage the printer.

When the Check Ink Level Message is
Displayed
The Check Ink Level message displays when the ink
level in a tank becomes low. Printing may continue. The
message display tells you that an ink tank is about to run
out of ink. Check the amount of ink remaining in the
tanks in the Status Monitor (Windows), Printmonitor
(Macintosh) or on the printer operation panel, and make
sure that you have replacement ink tanks for the colors
that are running low.

Note
z When the level of ink in a tank runs low, the printer
may not have sufficient ink to complete Cleaning B or
another maintenance operation that consumes a large
amount of ink. In such a case, perform print head
cleaning after replacing the ink tank.

4- 3

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing Ink Tanks

When the Rep. Ink Tank (Replace Ink
Tank) Message Is Displayed
When the ink in a tank runs out, the Rep. Ink Tank message displays and the printer stops printing. Replace the
ink tank as soon as this message appears. When you
open the right cover, you will see the amount of ink
remaining for each color along with its notation (Y= Yellow, M= Magenta, PM= Photo Magenta, C= Cyan, PC=
Photo Cyan, Bk= Photo Black/Matte Black). A flashing
color display means the ink tank of that color should be
replaced.

Note
z If more than one color has disappeared, replace the
ink tanks of the missing colors to recover printing.

4- 4

TOP
Ink Tank Handling Precautions
Obey the following precautions when you handle ink tanks.
Caution
z Always store ink tanks in a safe location where they
are out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance
immediately.

Important
z Before installing an ink tank, slowly rotate it from side
to side about 7 or 8 times before breaking its seal. If
you do not shake the tank the ink will precipitate,
causing a deterioration in the print quality.
z After breaking the seal on an ink tank, avoid dropping
or shaking it. Spilled ink can stain the work area.
z The ink supply ports of empty ink tanks may be
covered with ink. Always handle ink tanks carefully.
The ink could spill on your clothing and make stains
that cannot be removed.
z An ink tank should be used up within six months after
its seal has been broken or after it has been removed
from its package. After this time period has elapsed for
the ink tank, this could cause the quality of printing to
deteriorate.
z Never leave an ink tank removed from the printer for a
long period (over one month). The ink could clog and
lead to poor print quality.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing Ink Tanks

Replacing an Ink Tank

TOP
Open the right cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Follow the procedure below to replace an ink tank. You can
follow this same procedure to replace any ink tank.
Caution
z Always confirm that the replacement ink tank is the
same type as the tank that is installed in the printer. If
you mistakenly exchange a Photo Black ink tank and a
Matte Black ink tank, this could damage the printer. To
change the type of black ink tank, you must execute
ChangeBkInkType on the printer operation panel and
then exchange the black ink tanks. (→ P.4-47)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

The ink level is shown in the display; a flashing color
means that the ink tank of that color must be
replaced.
Ink
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Look at the printer display and make sure
that the printer is not operating.
You can replace an ink tank while the display shows
any of the following: Online, Offline, Check Ink
Level, or Rep. Ink Tank.
Information Power
Data
Message

Error!
E02818
Rep. Ink Tank

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Important
z The right cover cannot be opened while the printer is
initializing immediately after the printer is switched on,
during printhead cleaning, or during a print job. Please
wait until processing is completed.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Online

Offline
Menu

Offline
Please Wait...

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 5

Index

Replacing Ink Tanks

Press the ink tank lever of the color to
replace, then open the ink tank cover.

TOP
Slowly rotate a new ink tank still in its
package 7 or 8 times, then remove it from its
package.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Hold the empty ink tank by the grips on the
left and right side of the ink tank, then
remove it.

Important
z Always confirm that the replacement ink tank is the
same type as the tank that is installed in the printer. If
you mistake a Photo Black Ink tank for a Matte Black
Ink tank, this will cause poor print quality. To change
the type of black ink tank, you must execute
ChangeBkInkType on the printer operation panel and
then exchange the black ink tanks. (→ P.4-47)
z Always hold an ink tank by its left and right grips (b)
while you are handling it.

Place each ink tank in a vinyl or plastic bag and seal it.

4- 6

z Never touch the ink supply port (a) or the electrical
terminal (c). This could damage the ink tank, cause
poor print quality, or stain the work area.
a

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Important
z If ink remains in a removed ink tank, store the ink tank
with the ink supply port (a) pointing up. Ink leaked from
ink tanks will stain the work area.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing Ink Tanks

With the ink supply port facing down and the
label facing front as shown, insert the ink
tank into its holder.

TOP
When you finish replacing ink tanks, close
the right cover.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

The printer returns to the Online or Offline mode.
Printing restarts if the Rep. Ink Tank message
displayed during a print job.

Close the ink tank cover until you hear it
catch.

Important
z If an ink tank has not been installed, then in the printer
display you will see a Exxxx error code in the top line
and the No X Ink Tank message in the bottom line. Go
to Step 2 to correct this problem and make sure that all
the color ink tanks are installed.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Important
z The ink tanks are shaped so the cover will not close If
you set the wrong ink tank in a holder. If the ink tank
cover does not close, confirm that the color labels on
the holder match the color of the ink tank and the
direction of the ink tank.

8
4- 7

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

To replace an ink tank of any other color,
repeat Step 3 to Step 7.

Index

Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer

TOP

Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer
Ink tanks specified for use with the printer provide an ink
level detection function where the printer can detect when
ink runs out during printing to prevent damage to the
printhead.
If you use a refilled ink tank, the ink level detection function
will no longer function correctly, and the printer will halt
when ink runs out. Before you can use tanks like this, you
must switch off the ink level detection function.
If you print with the ink level detection switched off, this
could damage the printer (especially the printhead) or
cause other problems. Canon, Inc. can assume no
responsibility for damages caused by using ink tanks not
designed for use with the printer.
Caution
z Once the ink level detection function is switched off,
the ink level detection function cannot be recovered for
the ink tanks in the printer. To recover the ink level
display, the ink tanks must be replaced with new ink
tanks designed for use with the printer.
z If the same ink tank is repeatedly removed and
reinserted, this could damage the connection points
between the ink tank and the printer, leading to ink
leakage which could damage the printer.

Switching the Ink Level Detection Function Off

1
2
3
4

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select
System Setup then press [ ].
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Stop Ink Check,
then press [ ].
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Bk Ink Tank etc.,
then press the OK button.

Note
z To cancel the procedure of the ink level detection
function off at any time, just press the Online button.

When Stop Function? appears press [ ]
or [ ] to select Yes, then press OK button.
An equals sign (=) appears as a prefix to the setting
and the ink remains detection function of the
selected ink tank is switched off.

4- 8

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer

Executing a Print Job
After switching off the ink level detection function, every
time you execute a print job from the computer the Ink
level? message appears on the printer operation panel
display and the printer goes offline. To start the print job,
just press the Online button on the printer operation panel.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 9

Index

Cleaning the Printer

TOP

Cleaning the Printer
Clean the printer periodically to maintain high print quality
and to avoid problems.

Disconnect the power cord at the power supply.

Obey the following precautions when you clean the printer.
Caution
z When you clean the printer, always switch the printer
off and unplug its power cord from the power supply. If
the printer is accidentally switched on while you are
cleaning it, moving parts inside the printer could cause
personal injury if you are touching them.
z Never use a flammable liquid like thinner, benzene,
alcohol, etc. to clean the printer. If such combustible
materials come into contact with electrical component
inside the printer, this could cause a fire or electrical
shock.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Hold down the Power button for more than 1
sec. to display Shut Down.. then switch the
printer off.
Information Power
Data
Message

Shut Down..
Please Wait..

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Dampen a clean cloth, wring it out
completely, then use it to clean dirt and
paper dust from the printer exterior surfaces,
feed slot (a), and power cord plug, then wipe
the cleaned surfaces with a dry cloth.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Insert the plug of the power cord into the power
source.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Online

Offline
Menu

4- 10

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Cleaning the Exterior Covers
During normal use the printer surfaces require cleaning at
least once a month.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Index

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning Inside the Upper Cover
To maintain optimum use of the printer, you should clean
the interior surfaces of the upper cover when you see the
print surfaces or back sides of printouts fouled with ink,
after printing one complete roll, or at least once a month.
Also, you should clean the printer after replacing media,
especially after printing on small size media, after a
borderless printing job or after printing on the paper that
contains many paper dust.

TOP
Disconnect the power cord at the power supply.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Open the upper cover.

Important
z Immediately after borderless printing or printing on
small size paper, be sure to open the top cover and
clean around the platen. You should also diligently
clean the platen area at other times as well. If the
platen area is dirty, this could cause ink stains on the
back sides of printed sheets.

Hold down the Power button for more than 1
sec. to display Shut Down.. then switch the
printer off.
Information Power
Data
Message

Shut Down..
Please Wait..

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Offline
Menu

Contents

4- 11

Index

Cleaning the Printer

If paper dust has collected in the suction
ports (a) on the platen and the borderless
print ink groove (b), use the provided
cleaning brush to remove the dust and dirt
from the ports and groove.

TOP
Use a damp cloth (well wrung out) to clean
the upper cover handles, upper cover rollers
(c), the area around the platen (d), the paper
pressure plate (e), the exit guide (f), the
borderless print ink groove (b), and the
auxiliary output guide (g).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

c
d

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Note
z Wash the cleaner brush with water if it is dirty.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Important
z Never polish the areas under the upper cover with a
dry cloth during cleaning. This could create static
electricity that attracts dust and dirt that could lower
print quality.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 12

Index

Cleaning the Printer

While raising the flexible wire (h) with one
hand, wipe away the dirt on the flexible wire
guide (i).

TOP
Insert the plug of the power cord into the
power source.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
i

Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 13

Index

Cleaning the Paper Restraint

Cleaning the Paper Restraint
To maintain the proper use of the printer, use a piece of
plain paper to clean the back surface of the paper pressure
plate when you see the print surface or back surface of
media fouled with ink, especially before switching from a
small roll size to a larger size, or once a month.

TOP

Disconnect the power cord at the power
supply.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Before starting this procedure, prepare some plain paper
(or any media other than film).

Important
z The paper you use for cleaning should be plain paper
that does not easily produce cutting dust. If you use
film or any type of media that produces cutting dust
that could hang up, this could lower the print quality.

Hold down the Power button for more than 1
sec. to display Shut Down.. and switch the
printer off.
Information Power
Data
Message

Shut Down..
Please Wait..

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Push the release lever back to open it, fold a
sheet of plain paper (a) 2 or 3 times, insert it
from the back of the printer so it is under the
paper restraint (b), then use the paper to
clean the under side of the plate.
Be sure to wipe clean the entire length of the paper
restraint. When you are finished, pull the release
lever to the front to close it.

Online

b
Offline
Menu

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 14

Index

Cleaning the Paper Restraint

Insert the plug of the power cord into the
power source.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 15

Index

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

TOP

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
The maintenance cartridge vacuums excess ink that
accumulates as a result of borderless printing, printhead
cleaning, and ink mist produced by other operations. When
you see the message prompt that tells you to replace the
maintenance cartridge, replace the cartridge.

z Maintenance Cartridge MC-01

Checking Spacing Remaining in the
Maintenance Cartridge
You can confirm the amount of space remaining in the
maintenance cartridge at any time by checking the printer
operation panel display. You should always check the
amount of space remaining in the maintenance cartridge
before Heading Cleaning B, moving the printer, or any other
operation that could use up space in the maintenance
cartridge, and then replace the cartridge in advance.

Information Button Display
Information Power

Ink
Cleaning

You can check on how much space remains in the maintenance cartridge at any time (during a print job or error display) by pressing the Information button. The icon at the
right end of the bottom line shows you the amount of space
that remains in the maintenance cartridge.

Reading the Maintenance Cartridge Display

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

The height of the bar tells you how much more ink the
maintenance cartridge vacuum and store.

Contents
~700ml ~600ml ~500ml ~400ml ~300ml ~200ml 200ml~0ml
(7dot) (6dot) (5dot) (4dot) (3dot) (2dot) (1dot)

4- 16

Index

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
When the maintenance cartridge becomes full of ink, the
printer driver screen or the printer operation panel will
display a message to tell you that it is time to replace the
maintenance cartridge.

When You See the MTCart Full Soon
Message
When you see this message, this means that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full. You can continue to operate the printer. When the MTCart Full Soon message
appears, this means that the maintenance cartridge is
about to be full. Obtain a new maintenance cartridge.
Online
MTCart Full Soon

Note
z While this message is displayed, you cannot replace
an black ink tank or move the printer. First, you must
replace the maintenance cartridge.

TOP
When You See the Replace MT-Cart.
Message
This message means that the maintenance cartridge is
full, and the print job will stop when the Replace MTCart. message appears. Replace the ink tank as soon as
this message appears.
ERROR
E02818
Replace MT-Cart.

Note
z While this message is displayed, you cannot replace
the black ink tank, replace the printhead, or move the
printer. First, you must replace the maintenance
cartridge.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 17

Index

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

TOP

Maintenance Cartridge Handling Precautions

Maintenance Cartridge Replacement
Procedure

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Follow the guidelines below when you handle the
maintenance cartridge.

Follow the procedure below to replace a maintenance
cartridge.
z Replacing the maintenance cartridge (→ P.4-18)
z Replacing the Shaft Cleaner (→ P.4-21)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Important
z Never remove a maintenance cartridge until you are
ready to replace it.
z To avoid ink spills with a maintenance cartridge that is
full of ink, never drop it and always lay it flat (never at
an angle). Spilled ink can stain the work area.
z Ink adheres to the top of a used maintenance
cartridge. Handle maintenance cartridges carefully.
The ink could spill on your clothing and make stains
that cannot be removed.
z Once a maintenance cartridge has been installed in
one printer, it cannot be installed in another printer.

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Look at the printer display and make sure
that the printer is not operating.
Information Power
Data
Message

ERROR!
E02818
Replace MT-Cart.

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Online

Offline
Menu

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Open the maintenance cartridge cover.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 18

Index

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Pull out the tabs (a) of the used maintenance
cartridge and remove it horizontally with the
handles (b) on both sides.

TOP
While holding the used maintenance
cartridge level, slip it into the protective vinyl
bag that held the new cartridge, press down
on the bag to expel excess air, then close the
zipper completely.

Caution
z Always store a used maintenance cartridge in a safe
location out of the reach of children. If a child licks or
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance
immediately.

Important
z An full maintenance cartridge is heavy. Grip the
cartridge tightly by the left and right handles (b) and
hold it level when removing or storing it. If you drop a
maintenance cartridge or lay it down at an angle, this
could cause ink to leak and stain the work area.

4- 19

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Important
z In accordance with its active and on-going policy to
protect the environment, Canon collects used
maintenance cartridges. Follow the instructions
provided with the new maintenance cartridge that
describe how to process the used cartridge.

Check the top and bottom of the bag holding
the used maintenance cartridge, place it in
the packing box, then store it flat in a safe
location.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Important
z Be sure to store the removed maintenance cartridge in
a packing box and store it on a flat surface. An ink leak
can stain the work area.
z Before you place the vinyl bag into the packing box,
make sure that the zipper is closed completely.

Place the new maintenance cartridge into the
maintenance cartridge cover and make sure
that it is inserted completely.

TOP
Close the maintenance cartridge cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Press the Information button.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

The initialization of the new maintenance cartridge
finishes after about 5 seconds, then the printer
enters the Online or Offline mode.

Important
z Never touch the terminal (c). Touching the terminal on
the back of the maintenance cartridge could damage
it.

4- 20

Important
z Never attempt to remove or re-attach the maintenance
cartridge within 5 seconds after it enters the online
mode. The maintenance cartridge could be damaged.
Note
z The maintenance cartridge can also be replaced with
the printer switched off. In this case, never attempt to
remove or re-attach the maintenance cartridge for at
least 5 seconds after you switch the printer on again.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

TOP

Replacing the Shaft Cleaner

Press the Online button to display Offline.
Information Power
Data
Message

Offline

Feed Paper
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.

Offline
Menu

Hold down the [
second.

Grip the lever of the shaft cleaner and pull it
toward you.

Message

] button for more than 1

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

MAIN MENU
Chng Head Hght
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

The carriage moves to the center and Open Upper
Cover message appears on the display.

Remove the cap of a new shaft cleaner
provided with the maintenance cartridge.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Open the upper cover.

Note
z Remove the cap from a new shaft cleaner and attach it
to the used shaft cleaner, place the used shaft cleaner
in its box, place it in the original box with the used
maintenance cartridge, and dispose of them together.

4- 21

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Information Power
Data

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Install the new shaft cleaner into the
carriage.
Push in the shaft cleaner until you hear it catch.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The carriage returns to the home position and the
printer enters the Online mode.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 22

Index

Replacing the Printhead

TOP

Replacing the Printhead
Replace the printhead if two consecutive Head Cleaning B
executions do not restore acceptable print quality, if
ERROR E02813 is displayed, or if a customer service
center instructs you to replace the printhead. You can easily
stain your hands during printhead replacement, so wear the
plastic gloves provided in the box with the new printhead.

z Printhead BC-1350

Note
z When the ink supply runs low in an ink tank, procure a
new ink tank for replacement as soon as possible.

Printhead Handling Precautions
Always follow these precautions when handling a
printhead.
Caution
z Always store a printhead in a safe location where it is
out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance
immediately.

4- 23

z Never touch a printhead immediately after printing has
stopped. A printhead becomes extremely hot during
printing and can cause minor burns.

Important
z Try to avoid dropping or shaking a printhead. Spilled
ink can stain the work area.
z The ink supply port of a removed printhead may be
covered with ink. Always handle a printhead carefully.
The ink could spill on your clothing and make stains
that cannot be removed.
z Never break the seal on a printhead package until
immediately before you install the printhead. Always
handle a printhead carefully after breaking its seal. If a
printhead is stored with its seal broken this can cause
the nozzles to dry and lead to poor print quality.
z If you need to store a printhead temporarily, set it with
its nozzles (a) and electrical contact points (b) pointing
down. Damage to the nozzles or electrical contacts
can lead to poor print quality.
a
b

z Never attempt to disassemble or alter a printhead.
This could damage the printer.
z Never touch the nozzles (a) or the electrical contacts
(b) on the printhead. This could cause poor paper
feed.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Printhead

How to Replace the Printhead
To replace the printhead, execute Replace P.head on the
Maintenance menu then follow the messages on the
printer operation panel display to perform the procedure.
Before you adjust the position of the printhead after
replacing it, make sure a roll or cut sheets A3 (L) size or
wider is loaded in the printer.
z Remove printed and other media from the platen.
z Clean the paper pressure plate. (→ P.4-14)
z Execute Replace P.head
z After ink has drained from the printhead, remove it.
z Install the new printhead.

Important
z Always follow the prescribed procedure to replace a
printhead. If you fail to follow the prescribed
procedure, this could cause the printhead to leak ink
that will stain the printer and the work area.

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.
Information Power

TOP
Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

↓

Select Replace P.head then press [
Maintenance
Replace P.head

Online

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Maintenance,
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Maintenance

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

↓

] to select Yes, then press

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

4- 24

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Replace P.head
Yes

Data
Message

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Printhead replacement processing starts when you
see Please Wait.. displayed. The processing
requires about 3 minutes to complete.
When preparation is finished, Open UpperCover is
displayed.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Printhead

Open the upper cover.

TOP
If the printhead adjustment lever is in either
the high or low position, return it to the center
(normal) position, then raise the carriage
cover completely.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Rep. P.head OK is displayed on the printer
operation panel.

Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
z Before you start the procedure, wring out a damp cloth
and clean the carriage cover, printhead cover, and
printhead lock lever if they are dirty.

Raise the carriage cover so it is completely
open.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 25

Index

Replacing the Printhead

Pull the printhead lock lever completely
forward to open it.

TOP
Remove the old printhead.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Raise the printhead lock cover completely to
open it.

Caution
z If you are going to replace the printhead immediately
after printing, wait a few minutes before performing the
replacement. The metal components of the printhead
may be hot immediately after printing, and touching
these parts could cause a minor burn.

Important
z Never touch the carriage terminal. This could damage
the printer.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 26

Index

Replacing the Printhead

While holding the new printhead by the grips
(c), remove it from its package; remove the
orange protective cap 1 (d), then on both
sides of protective cap 2 (e), while pressing
in both grips (f) as shown, pull down to
remove the cap.

TOP
With the nozzles pointing down and the
electrical contacts facing the printer, insert
the new printhead into the carriage.
Handle the printhead carefully so its nozzles do not
touch the carriage, then press down to ensure that it
is installed completely.

c
d

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Important
z The inside surface protective cap 2 (e) is covered with
ink to protect the nozzles. Do not touch this area of the
cap or drop it. Performing so could cause problems.
z When handling the printhead, always hold it by the
grips (c) on the left and right sides.
z Never touch the nozzles (a) or the electrical contacts
(b). This could damage the printhead, cause poor print
quality, or stain the work area.
a

Pull the printhead lever toward you and down
to lock the printhead in place.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
z Never try to re-attach the protective caps or packing
material removed from the printhead.

4- 27

Index

Replacing the Printhead

Push the printhead lever toward the back of
the printer and down, then press down until
you hear it click and lock.

TOP
Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Lower the carriage cover and press down
until you hear it click and lock.

As soon as you close the upper cover of the printer,
Please Wait.. is displayed in the bottom line of the
display and processing begins. The processing
requires about 10 minutes to complete.
As soon as processing is finished, Advanced Adj. is
displayed and the printhead is adjusted
automatically. (→ P.4-40)

Important
z The printhead adjustment does not execute if the Auto
Print feature on the Main menu is set to Off. After
replacing the printhead, perform Advanced Adj. under
Auto Head Adj. on the printer operation panel to
adjust the printhead automatically. (→ P.4-40)
z The printhead adjustment cannot be performed if the
loaded roll paper or cut sheets are not at least A3 (L)
size or larger. Printhead adjustment continues as soon
as the media is set.
z Never attempt to remove an ink tank when the ink
tanks are filling during the installation procedure and
immediately after replacing the printhead, or during the
printer cleaning operation.

4- 28

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Cutter Blade

Replacing the Cutter Blade
Follow the procedure below to change the position of a
blade that no longer cuts cleanly. The cutting position can
be changed twice for one blade. Once the cutting position
adjustment dial is set to 3, replace the blade with a new
one.

z Cutter Blade CT-02

TOP

Press [ ] or [ ] to display System Setup
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
System Setup

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Change Cutter,
then press [ ].
System Setup
Change Cutter

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

↓

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

↓

] to select Yes, then press

Change Cutter
Yes

Carriage Moving appears in the bottom line of the
display, and Open Upper Cover appears after the
carriage moves to the center of the platen.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

4- 29

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Cutter Blade

TOP

Open the upper cover.
Important
z After removing the cutter blade, never touch the
cutting edge (b). This could cause personal injury.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
b

8
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
z If the cutter blade or the carriage is dirty, before you
perform the procedure to adjust the operation of the
cutter blade, wring out a damp, clean cloth and use it
to clean the cutter blade and the carriage.

Grasp the cutter blade (a) by the grips then
remove it from the carriage.

4- 30

Rotate the cutter position adjustment dial 1
notch in the direction shown.
If the dial is already at notch 3 replace the cutter
blade with a new one.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z The position adjustment dial has 3 positions that can
be adjusted; the blade can be used at three steps (1,
2, 3). The blade cannot be used with the dial returned
to a position.
z Once you have set the cutter blade dial to position 3,
procure a new cutter blade for future replacement.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Replacing the Cutter Blade

Install the cutter blade back into the carriage.

TOP
Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Note
z To remove the protective cap from a new cutter blade,
turn the cap in the direction of the arrow. Also, you
must attach the removed cap to the used cutter blade
and discard the used blade in accordance with local
laws and regulations.

Please Wait.. appears in the bottom line of the
display, the carriage moves, then the Reset Cut
Count message displays.

Once you have set the cutter position dial to
2 or 3 and pressed the Stop button and
replaced the cutter blade, press the OK
button.
Reset Cut Count
Press/OK Stop

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The printer returns to the Online or Offline mode.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 31

Index

Transporting the Printer

Transporting the Printer
Before you transport the printer, follow the procedure below
to prepare the printer for shipping so its internal
mechanisms are protected. To pack the printer for
transport, refer to the Quick Start Guide and follow the
installation procedure in reverse order.
(→ Quick Start Guide)

Important
z Before you move the printer always perform this
procedure by executing the Move Printer menu and
following the instructions on the display. The printer
could be damaged if you attempt to move it after
disconnecting the power cord before switching off the
printer. If you accidentally disconnect the power cord
before switching the printer off, reattach the power
cord, reinstall the ink tanks, then perform the
procedure again from Step 1. (→ Quick Start Guide)
z You cannot execute Move Printer once the MTCart
Full Soon or Replace MT-Cart appears. You can
execute Move Printer after the maintenance cartridge
has been replaced.
z Never tilt the printer while you are moving it. This could
spill ink inside the printer and foul the work area.
z If you cannot avoid tilting or standing the printer on end
in order to move, please contact the dealer where you
purchased the printer or the nearest service center.

TOP

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Online

↓

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Move Printer
then press [ ].
Maintenance
Move Printer

4- 32

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Maintenance,
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Maintenance

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Online

Offline
Menu

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Contents
↓

Index

Transporting the Printer

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

] to select Yes, then press

TOP
Open the ink tank covers and remove all of
the ink tanks.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Move Printer
Yes

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Open RightCover is displayed.

Open the right cover.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Remove Ink Tank is displayed on the operation
panel.

Place each ink tank in a vinyl or plastic bag and seal
it.

Note
z Store the removed tanks with the ink supply ports up
(a). Ink leaked from ink tanks will stain the work area.
a

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 33

Index

Transporting the Printer

Close and lock all the ink tank covers and
close the right cover.

TOP
Lower the lever of the holder stopper,
remove the stopper, remove the roll from the
roll holder, then store the roll holder and the
holder stopper.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Please Wait.. appears followed by Ink Draining
while the ink is sucked from inside the tubes. This
processing requires about 4 minutes to complete.
The printer switches off automatically once
processing is completed.

9
10

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Open the upper cover.

Disconnect the power cord and the interface
cable.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Remove the roll holder.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
This could damage the printer.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 34

Index

Transporting the Printer

Clamp the belt with the belt stopper then use
the hex wrench to fasten the belt stopper.

16
17
18
19

Note
z Attach the belt stopper that was removed at installation
and stored.

15
4- 35

Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Tape each printer cover in the reverse order
of tape removal during setup.

TOP
If you are using the optional stand, follow the
installation procedure in reverse to remove it.
Remove the printer in reverse order of setup
procedure.
If you are using the stand, follow the
installation procedure in reverse to
disassemble it.
Reattach the tapes and shipping materials to
the roll holder and printer, then pack them in
the original shipping box.

This completes preparing the printer for moving.

Important
z Follow the procedures in the Quick Start Guide to reinstall the printer at the new location after moving the
printer.
z If you execute Move Printer and then unplug the
power cord from the power source before switching
the printer off, this could damage the printer. Connect
the power cord, install the ink tanks, and perform the
procedure again from Step 1.(→ Quick Start Guide)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Checking the Condition of the Printer

TOP

Checking the Condition of the Printer
When you see that the printouts are faded and uneven, or
streaked with white lines, print a nozzle check pattern to
determine whether the nozzles are blocked. Before you
print a nozzle check pattern, make sure roller paper or cut
sheets A3 (L) size or wider are loaded in the printer.

Note
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure at least one
sheet of unused A3 paper (not the blank sides of used
paper) or larger are set.

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Online

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Press [
press [
MAIN MENU
Test Print

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

] or [
].

] to select Test Print then
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Nozzle Check,
then press OK button.
Test Print
Nozzle Check

The nozzle check pattern prints. The printer returns
to the online mode and displays Online in the
display as soon as printing completes.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 36

Index

Checking the Condition of the Printer

If there are no breaks in the horizontal lines of each
color, the nozzle check pattern is normal.
• Sample: Printhead Operation Normal

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

• Sample: Printhead Operation Not Normal

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

If any of the lines are broken, perform the following
procedure:
1. Execute printhead cleaning. (→ P.4-38)
2. Print the nozzle check pattern again.
3. If the nozzle check patterns are still broken
after repeating this procedure several times,
call the dealer where you purchased the
printer or call the nearest service center.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 37

Index

Cleaning the Printhead

TOP

Cleaning the Printhead
If the nozzles become blocked, cleaning the printhead may
recover optimum printer operation.

Note
z When you set Nozzle Check, the printer performs a
nozzle check and recovery automatically for every
page specified for printing. Before shipping a printer,
the setting is set for 10 Pages.

Types of Printhead Cleaning
There are two methods for printhead cleaning.

Head Cleaning A:
Execute when printing appears uneven, or when the
printhead is dirty. This cleaning method consumes the
least amount of ink. Head Cleaning A requires about 1
minute.

Head Cleaning B:
Perform this cleaning if no ink is coming out of the printhead or if Head Cleaning A did not correct the problem.
Head Cleaning B requires about 3 minutes.

Printhead Cleaning Procedures
Follow this procedure to clean the printhead. The procedure
is almost the same for each cleaning method.
If one execution of Head Cleaning A does not correct the
problem, perform Head Cleaning B. If Head Cleaning B
does not correct the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two
or three times. If the printer operation does not recover after
performing Head Cleaning B, the printhead may be at the
end of its service life. Call for service or contact the dealer
where you purchased the printer. (→ P.4-23)

Note
z You can execute Head Cleaning A by holding down
the Information button for more than three seconds.

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Contents

4- 38

Index

Cleaning the Printhead

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Select Head Cleaning then press [
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

TOP

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select the printhead
cleaning method then press OK button.
Head Cleaning
Head Cleaning A

Printhead cleaning starts. When printhead cleaning
is finished, the printer returns Online.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Print the nozzle check pattern to determine if
printing has been recovered. (→ P.4-36)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 39

Index

Aligning the Printhead

TOP

Aligning the Printhead
Aligning Printhead Procedure

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data

If printed vertical lines are bent, or if the colors are faded
and uneven, perform the printhead position adjustment.
The printer will adjust the position of the printhead
automatically as it reads the pattern used to adjust the
position of the printhead. Before you adjust the position of
the printhead, make sure a roll or cut sheets A3 (L) size or
wider are loaded in the printer.

Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Offline
Menu

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Use the following procedure to adjust the position of the
printhead.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Note
z When you adjust the printhead, you should use the
media of the type (other than film) that you use most
frequently.
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure at least one
sheet of unused A3 paper (not the blank sides of used
paper) or larger are set.

3
4

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer,
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer

4- 40

Online

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Auto Head Adj.,
then press [ ].
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

↓

Contents
Index

Aligning the Printhead

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Advanced Adj. or
Standard Adj., then press [ ].
Advanced Adj. adjusts the gaps between the even
and odd numbered nozzles, the color boundaries,
and print direction boundaries.
Standard Adj. adjusts only the print direction
boundaries.
Auto Head Adj.
Advanced Adj.

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

↓

] to select Yes, then press

Advanced Adj.
Yes

As the printhead adjustment pattern prints, the
printer reads the pattern and automatically adjusts
the settings for position of the printhead.
After the printhead adjustment is finished, Online
appears in the printer operation display.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 41

Index

Adjusting Amount of Media Feed

TOP

Adjusting Amount of Media Feed
z There is no automatic adjustment for highly
transparent film. Execute Fine Tuning to perform the
adjustment with manual entry. (→ P.4-43)

Media Feed Adjustment Procedure
Perform the procedure below to perform Adjust Band to
adjust the amount of line feed if you see white lines or dark
color lines in your printed images. As the band adjustment
pattern prints, the printer reads the results of the print and
automatically adjusts the settings of the amount of line feed for
the media currently loaded in the printer. Before you perform
the band adjustment, make sure a roll or cut sheet A3 (L) size
or wider is loaded in the printer.

Important
z Before you adjust line feed, you must use the
operation panel to select media type for the paper
loaded for printing. If the value of the media type
selection does not match the paper loaded for printing,
you will not achieve good print results and the quality
of the printing will be poor.
z Select Feed Priority > Band Joint in order to perform
Adjust Band.
Note
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure at least one
sheet of unused A3 paper (not the blank sides of used
paper) or larger are set.

4- 42

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Online

Offline
Menu

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer,
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

↓

Index

Adjusting Amount of Media Feed

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Band,
then press [ ].
Adjust Printer
Adjust Band

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Standard Adj.,
then press [ ].
Adjust Band
Standard Adj.

↓

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

TOP
Adjusting Line Feed Manually
The line feed can be fine adjusted manually to increase or
decrease the amount of feed. Follow the procedure below
to perform this adjustment manually.

↓

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

] to select Yes, then press

Auto Adjustment
Yes

As the band adjustment pattern prints, the printer
reads the results of the print and automatically
adjusts the settings of the amount of line feed for the
media currently loaded in the printer.
After the amount of line feed has been adjusted, the
printer returns to the Online mode.

Online

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Band,
then press [ ].
Adjust Printer
Adjust Band

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Fine Tuning,
then press [ ].
Adjust Band
Fine Tuning

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer,
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

↓

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Displays the values of the current settings.

4- 43

Index

Adjusting Amount of Media Feed

Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select the
desired setting value then press the OK
button.
If you want to widen the gap between the bands,
enter a number from 1 to 3.
If you want to narrow the gap between the bands,
enter a number from -1 to -3.
Fine Tuning
=0

The selected setting is prefixed with an equals sign
(=) to denote the current setting.

Press the Online button.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Information Power
Data
Message

Online
Bk

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

The Online lamp lights and the printer is ready to
print.

Note
z The value for the amount of feed adjustment can be
performed during printing. However, if you change the
amount of feed during printing, the print result may be
distorted by about 3 cm immediately after the change.
z Adjust in the plus (+) direction if white stripes are
visible in the output image, or adjust in the minus (−)
direction if dense color stripes are visible.

4- 44

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust

TOP

Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust
When using a media like backlight film that easily creates
cutting dust you can perform the setting to reduce the
amount of cutter waste that can cause a deterioration in the
quality of printing or damage the printhead. The cutter dust
reduction function can be set for each media type.
(→ P.1-21)
If you set the cutter dust reduction function, black lines will
print at the leading edge and trailing edge of the printed
sheets.

The cutter
dust reduction
lines that will
be printed.

Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Online

↓

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Press [ ] or [ ] to select the name of the
media type then press [ ].
Med.Detail Set.
Backlit Film

4- 45

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Med.Detail Set.,
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Med. Detail Set.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Online

Offline
Menu

The position
that will be cut

Important
z Do not use this function for plain paper, thin paper, or
any other media that buckles easily. This type of media
may not cut properly and cause paper jams.
z Borderless printing cannot be performed with the
cutter dust reduction feature is set. In order to perform
borderless printing, you must switch the cutter dust
reduction function off.

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Contents
↓

Index

Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust

Press [ ] or [ ] to display
CutDustReduct. then press [
Backlit Film
CutDustReduct.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select a value for the
setting then press OK button.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

To switch the cutter dust reduction function on for the
selected media type, select On or to release the
function for the media type select Off.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

CutDustReduct.
On

The selection is prefixed with an equals sign (=) to
denote that the cut waste reduction function is
selected.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 46

Index

Changing the Black Ink Type

TOP

Changing the Black Ink Type
This printer employs two types of black ink, either Photo
Black Ink or Matte Black Ink, to best match the media type
and the requirements of the print job. For more details
about the types of black ink, please refer to Chapter 2 “The
Suitable Black Ink for Media”. (→ P.2-2)

z Photo Black Ink Tank BCI-1431BK
z Matte Black Ink Tank BCI-145IMBK

Follow this procedure to switch the type of black ink.
Remove printed and other media from the platen.
On the operation panel perform ChangeBkInkType.
After the processing to drain the ink is finished, remove
the black ink tank.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Important
z When you execute ChangeBkInkType, the printer
consumes about 45 ml of black ink and about 15 ml of
the colored inks in total. Before you change the ink
tanks, confirm that there is sufficient ink in the tank. It
is recommended that you use a new ink tank
whenever possible. (→ P.4-2)
z The Photo Black and Matte Black ink tanks cannot be
installed at the same time.
z You cannot execute ChangeBkInkType once the
MTCart Full Soon or Replace MT-Cart appears. You
can execute ChangeBkInkType after the
maintenance cartridge has been replaced.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Install the black ink that you want to use.
Confirm the installed ink tank.
Aligning the Printhead

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 47

Index

Changing the Black Ink Type

Black Ink Tank Exchange Procedure

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.

As soon as processing is completed, the Open
RightCover message is displayed.

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

↓

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Open the right cover.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Online

Press [ ] or [ ] to select
ChangeBkInkType, then press [
MAIN MENU
ChangeBkInkType

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Online

Offline
Menu

] to select Yes, then press

The black ink drains while the Please Wait...
message is displayed. The draining requires about 1
minute to complete.

Information Power

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Press [ ] or [
OK button.
ChangeBkInkType
Yes

Data
Message

TOP

Press down on the lever of the black ink tank
and open the ink tank cover.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 48

Index

Changing the Black Ink Type

Hold the black ink tank by the grips and
remove it.

TOP
With the black ink tank that you are going to
use still in is bag, slowly rotate it 7 or 8 times
then remove from the bag.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Place each ink tank in a vinyl or plastic bag and seal
it.

Important
z Always hold an ink tank by its left and right grips (b)
while you are handling it.

Important
z If ink remains in a removed ink tank, store the ink tank
with the ink supply port (a) pointing up. Ink leaked from
ink tanks will stain the work area.
a

z Never touch the ink supply port (a) or the terminal (c).
This could damage the ink tank, cause poor print
quality, or stain the work area.
a

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

4- 49

Index

Changing the Black Ink Type

With the ink supply port facing down and the
label facing front as shown, insert the black
ink tank into its holder.

TOP
Close the right cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

The name of the ink tank type you just set is
displayed.

12
Important
z The ink tanks are shaped so the cover will not close if
you set the wrong ink tank in a holder. If the ink tank
cover does not close, confirm that the color label on
the holder matches the color of the ink tank, and make
sure that ink tank is facing the proper direction.

Confirm that the ink type is correct then
press OK button.
If the ink type display is incorrect press Stop, open
the right cover, and replace the black ink tank.
z For a matte black ink tank:
ChangeBkInkType
MBk Ink Tank OK?

Close the ink tank cover until you hear it
catch.

z For a photo black ink tank:
ChangeBkInkType
Bk Ink Tank OK?

The operation panel displays Ink Filling.. while the
ink fills. Ink filling requires about 15 minutes.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

When the procedure is finished, the printer returns
Online.

Align the printhead.

Contents

(→ P.4-40)

4- 50

Index

TOP

Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Network Environment
Click on the checkbox to print the section contents.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Before Using the Printer .............................................................................5-2
Required System Environment .............................................................................. 5-2
The Network Environment ..................................................................................... 5-3

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX) .............................5-5
Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Network .......................................................... 5-5
Connecting the LAN Cable .................................................................................... 5-5
Setting the Printer IP Address ............................................................................... 5-7
Performing the TCP/IP Protocol Settings ............................................................ 5-15
Setting the Printer for Sharing ............................................................................. 5-18

Macintosh Network Settings .....................................................................5-20
Procedures Required for a Macintosh Network ................................................... 5-20
Setting a Macintosh ............................................................................................. 5-21
Setting AppleTalk Protocol .................................................................................. 5-25
Install the Printer Driver ....................................................................................... 5-31

NetWare Settings (Windows) ...................................................................5-33
Procedures Required for a NetWare Network ..................................................... 5-33
Setting the Printer Frame Type ........................................................................... 5-34
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service .................................................................... 5-37
Setting NetWare Protocol .................................................................................... 5-40
Setting the Computer for NetWare ...................................................................... 5-44

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Printing with UNIX ....................................................................................5-45
Using LPD to Print ............................................................................................... 5-45
Using FTP to Print ............................................................................................... 5-46

Initializing the Settings ..............................................................................5-47
List of Network Settings ............................................................................5-48
Software Applications that can be used for Network Settings ..................5-51

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 1

How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages

Start Print → Before clicking the Start Print button

Index

Before Using the Printer

TOP

Before Using the Printer
This section describes some points that you should know
about checking the compatibility of network environments
or the network that you are using before you use the
optional network interface expansion board. For more
details about the network settings, we recommend that you
consult your network administrator.

Required System Environment
This section describes the system environments that are
supported by the network interface of the printer. The lists
below describe the system environments required to
support the network in use.

Using a TCP/IP Network for Printing

5- 2

z Compatible Operating Systems:
• Windows Server 2003
• Windows XP
• Windows 2000
• Windows NT 4.0
• Windows Me, Windows 98
• Mac OS 8.6 or later
• Mac OS X v10.1 or later
• Solaris Version 9
• Red Hat Linux 9
z Compatible Computer
• IBM PC or IBM compatible PC
• A Macintosh Series computer equipped with a
Power PC processor
• Sun Microsystems SPARC platform computer

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Note
z If you are using Windows NT 4.0, install Service Pack
6 or later.
z If you are using Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later, you can
use the Mac OS Zeroconf function to connect. (Also, if
you are using Mac OS 8.6, 9.x with the Canon
imagePROGRAF printer driver for Macintosh installed,
you can also use the Zeroconf function to connect the
printer.)

Using an AppleTalk Network for Printing
z Compatible Computer
• A Macintosh Series computer equipped with a
Power PC processor.
z Compatible Operating Systems
• Mac OS 8.6 or later
• Mac OS X v10.1 or later
z Compatible AppleTalk
• EtherTalk Phase 2
z Required Memory
• 24 MB or more for Mac OS 8.6, 32 MB or more for
Mac OS 9.x
• 128 MB or more is required for Mac OS X.

Note
z This printer is not compatible with a Macintosh
LocalTalk Network.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Before Using the Printer

Using a NetWare Network for Printing
z Compatible Server
• Novell NetWare Version 4.2/5.1/6.0
z Compatible Clients
• Windows XP Professional
• Windows 2000 Server
• Windows 2000 Professional
• Windows NT Server 4.0
• Windows NT Workstation 4.0
• Windows Me, Windows 98
z Compatible Computer
• IBM PC or IBM compatible PC

TOP
The Network Environment
Use the diagrams as reference to determine the type of
network where the printer is connected, and then follow the
required procedure.

z Windows Network Examples
If you are using Windows network, you can use TCP/IP
as the protocol. (→ P.5-5)
Windows 98

Windows Me

Note
z NetWare Version 6.0 iPrint is not supported.

Windows XP

W6400

Note
z When you perform the settings for a TCP/IP network on a
Windows computer, each computer can send print jobs
directly to the printer connected to the network and have
them print. Also, if a print server is set up for Windows
Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows
NT, each printer can send print jobs to the print server, the
print server can manage these jobs, and then send them
directly to the printer on the network. This greatly
increases the efficiency of job execution. For more details
about print server settings, please refer to “Setting the
Printer for Sharing”. (→ P.5-18)
z The NetBIOS protocol cannot be used with this printer.

5- 3

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

TCP/IP

Windows 2000 Server

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Before Using the Printer

TOP

z Macintosh Network Examples
For a Macintosh computer, the AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or
TCP/IP, or Zeroconf (Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later) protocol is used. (→ P.5-20)
Macintosh

Macintosh

W6400

z NetWare Network Examples
The NetWare protocol is used for printing in the network
environment shown in the illustration below. The NetWare client software must be installed on every Server
and Client computer. (→ P.5-33)
Windows Me

Windows 2000

5- 4

Server

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

NetWare

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

AppleTalk, TCP/IP

Windows 98

Note
z The TCP/IP and AppleTalk protocols can be used
together even in a NetWare server network
environment, In such a case, be sure to set which
protocol to use.

W6400

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

TOP

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)
This chapter describes the setting methods and procedures
for connecting the printer to a TCP/IP network.

Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Network
Here is a summary of the procedures required to set the
printer for use on a TCP/IP network.

The following procedure should be performed by the
network system administrator.
1

→ Quick Start
Guide
First, install the optional network interface board

Installing the network interface board

Connecting the LAN Cable

→ P.5-5

Connect the LAN port to the HUB with the LAN cable.
3

Setting the Printer IP Address

Install the Printer Driver

Connecting the LAN Cable

Use a LAN cable to connect the printer LAN
port to the HUB port.

→ P.5-7

Set an IP address that will allow the printer to
communicate with the computer that you want to use.
Use either of the utilities below to perform this setting.
• GARO Device Setup Utility (Canon software
application provided with the printer.)
• ARP/PING Command
• Printer operation panel

5- 5

→ Quick Start
Guide
Install the Canon imagePROGRAF printer driver for
either Windows or Macintosh (OS X). Follow the
procedure on the Quick Start Guide to install the
printer driver. There is no printer driver for UNIX.
Performing the TCP/IP Protocol
→ P.5-15
Settings
Performing the TCP/IP protocol settings according to
you needs as required. You can use the Web Browser
to perform these settings from your computer.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Use a LAN cable to connect the computer
LAN port to the HUB port.

Note
z When this printer is connected to and used on a
network, switch the printer on then check the LINK
lamp (a) to confirm that it lights and remains on. This
lamp lights green with a 100-Base-TX connection and
lights yellow for a 10-BaseT connection.
z If the LINK lamp does not light, check the following
points:
• Is the HUB switched on?
If the HUB is switched off, switch it on.
• Is the LAN cable connected correctly?
Confirm that the LAN cable connectors are clicked
and locked in place correctly.
• Is the LAN cable defective?
Connect another LAN cable and visually check the
lamp again.
• Is the communication method correct for the HUB?
If the communication method (mode and speed) set
for the printer and the HUB with auto recognition do
not match, follow the procedure below to perform the
connection settings manually.
1. Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup then
press [ ].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Ethernet Driver then
press [ ].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Auto Detect then
press [ ].

5- 6

TOP
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Off, then press OK
button.
6. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Comm. Mode then
press [ ].
7. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Half Duplex or Full
Duplex then press OK button.
8. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Ethernet Type then
press [ ].
9. Press [ ] or [ ] to select 10 Base-T or 100
Base-TX then press OK button.
10.Press [ ] or [ ] to select Spanning Tree then
press [ ].
11.Press [ ] or [ ] to select Not Use or Use then
press OK button.
12.Press [ ] twice to display Store Setting then
press [ ].
13.Press the OK button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Setting the Printer IP Address
Before setting the printer protocol, you must set the IP
address to enable communication between the printer and
the computer. Use either of the utilities below to perform
this setting. Use whichever is easiest to perform the
settings.

z GARO Device Setup Utility (→ P.5-7)
Use this software utility to perform the computer settings
if you are using a Windows computer. Perform the subnets mask and default gateway settings with the Remote
UI.

z ARP/PING Command (→ P.5-10)
Use this command to perform the printer IP address setting on the command prompt screen. Performing the
subnets mask and default gateway settings with the
Remote UI.

z Printer Operation Panel (→ P.5-12)
To connect a Macintosh via an AppleTalk connection,
perform the settings on the printer operation panel.
However, you can print without performing the printer
network settings if you use the Zeroconf function (IP
Print (Auto)) with Max OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later to connect the printer.

Important
z Before setting the IP address, confirm that the printer
is switched on and connected to the network.

5- 7

TOP

Setting the frame type with GARO Device
Setup Utility
If you are using Windows, use the GARO Device Setup
Utility, the software utility provided with the printer, to
perform the printer network settings.

z Installing GARO Device Setup Utility

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Important
z If you are using Windows Server 2003, Windows XP,
Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, you must log in as
a member of the Administrators group.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Mount the provided User Software CD-ROM
in the computer CD-ROM drive.
Setup Menu window appears.

Note
z If the AutoPlay function is switched off, double-click the
My Computer icon on the desktop, click the CD-ROM
drive icon, and then from the File menu select
AutoPlay.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Click the Install Individual Software button.

TOP
Follow the instructions on the screen.
This completes the installation of the GARO Device
Setup Utility.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

z Setting Network Information

On the desktop, click the Start button, point
to Programs, then select GARO Device
Setup Utility > GARO Device Setup Utility.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Click the Install button of the GARO Device
Setup Utility.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Select the name of the printer you want to
set from the list of printer names, then select
Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 8

Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address assigned to the printer
and click the Set button.
If the IP address is set automatically, select
Automatic for the Setting IP Address, then click
the check boxes for DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP for the
features you want to use. To specify a fixed IP
address, select Manual for the Setting IP Address.

TOP
Click the OK button when the confirmation
message is displayed.

When you are finished performing the
settings, select Exit from the Printer menu.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

The printer is shipped from the factory with
AppleTalk and NetWare disabled for use. When
printing via AppleTalk, select Phase2 for AppleTalk
Phase.
When printing with NetWare, select the frame type in
use for NetWare Frame Type.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 9

Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Setting with the ARP/PING Command

To perform the setting with the ARP/PING command,
you need the MAC address of the printer. The MAC
address can be found printed on the status print or on
the seal attached to the expansion board, or on the
Information menu displayed on the printer operation
panel.

z Checking the Printer MAC Address
Perform the procedure below to print a Status Print so
you can check the MAC address. Before printing, set a
roll of media larger than A3.

Note
z The MAC address can be found printed on the nozzle
check pattern or the printhead adjustment pattern, or
on the printer operation panel: MAIN MENU >
Information > MAC Address.

If the printer power is off, press the Power
button to switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data
Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Offline
Menu

TOP
Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Press [
press [
MAIN MENU
Test Print

] or [
].

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

] to select Test Print then

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Status Print,
then press OK button.
Test Print
Status Print

The information about the printer settings is printed.
After the nozzle check pattern has printed Online is
displayed in the operation panel and the printer is
ready to print.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

After a few moments, Online appears in the display.

Contents

5- 10

Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

The MAC Address is printed in the Status Print at the
location indicated in the sample below.

TOP

z Setting the IP Address

If you are using a Windows computer, start
from the MS-DOS prompt or the command
prompt.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

If you are using UNIX or Linux, open the Console
screen.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Execute the following commands to add
static entries to the arp table.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

arp -s
IP Address:
Specify the IP address assigned to the printer. Enter
the 4-digit numbers (decimal number 0 to 255) using
periods (.) as delimiters. Confirm the allocated
address with the network system administrator.
MAC Address:
Specify the fixed MAC address of the printer. 2 digits
for each column, using hyphens as delimiters.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Entry Sample:
arp -s XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 00-00-85-XX-XX-XX

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 11

Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Execute the following commands to set the
IP address for the printer.
ping -l 479
IP address:
Specify the same IP address used in Step 2.
Entry Sample:

TOP

Setting with the Printer Operation Panel
The network information can be set up on the printer
operation panel. Enter the settings for the IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX -l 479
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

(For Windows)
ping –s 479 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

(For Red Hat Linux)
ping –s XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 479
(For Solarius)

Note
z The “l” of the “-l” entry is an alphabetic lower case “l”
(el).
z The subnet mask and gateway address are set to
“0.0.0.0”.
After completing the above settings, use the Remote
UI or the printer operation panel to perform the subnet
mask and gateway address settings for your network.
(→ P.5-12, P.5-15)
This completes the preparation for printer protocol settings.

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Set Interface

Press [
press [

] or [
].

Interface Set
TCP/IP

Press [
press [
TCP/IP
IP Setting

5- 12

↓

] to select TCP/IP, then

↓

] or [
].

] to select IP Setting, then

↓

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Press [
press [

] or [
].

IP Setting
IP Address

] to select IP Address, then

9
10

IP Address
=0.0.0.0

To enter the IP address allocated for the
printer, press [ ] or [ ] to change the
number, then press [ ] or the OK button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to change the number
setting of the subnet mask, then press OK
button.
Subnet Mask
=0.0.0.0

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Press [ ] or [ ] to set the number of the
subnet mask in use on the network, then
press OK button.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The selected digit increments by 1 every time you
press [ ]. However, at 255 the number rolls up to 0.

The selected digit decrements by 1 every time you
press [ ]. However, at 0 the number rolls up to 255.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

IP Address
=XXX.0.0.0

Note
z If you press and hold the [ ] or [ ] button, the value
increases or decreases in steps of 10

Press [ ] once then press [ ] or [ ] to
select Subnet Mask then press [ ].
IP Setting
Subnet Mask

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to change the number
setting of the IP address, then press the OK
button.

TOP

Repeat Steps 6 to 7 to enter the IP address
assigned to the printer.

Subnet Mask
=XXX.0.0.0

Repeat Steps 10 to 11 to enter the subnet
mask that the network is using.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Subnet Mask
=255.255.255.0

Enter the default gateway.

Contents

IP Address
=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

5- 13

Enter the subnet mask.

Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Press [ ] once then press [ ] or [
select Default G/W then press [ ].
IP Setting
Default G/W

] to

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to change the number
setting of the default subnet mask, then
press OK button.
Default G/W
=0.0.0.0

To enter the default gateway IP address,
press [ ] or [ ] to select the number to
change, then press OK button.
The selected digit increments by 1 every time you
press [ ]. However, at 255 the number rolls up to 0.
The selected digit decrements by 1 every time you
press [ ]. However, at 0 the number rolls up to 255.

Repeat Steps 14 to 15 to enter the default
gateway IP address.
Now you are ready to register the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway setting.

Press the [

Press the OK button.
If you want to cancel the setting, press Stop button
for at least 1 second.
Store Setting
OK?

The printer restarts after Storing appears on the
display.
When you are finished with the settings, the printer
returns Online.
If an error occurs, check the settings then set them
again.

Important
z If you need to change the IP address, subnet mask, or
default gateway, you must perform Step 18 to register
the setting. If the setting is not registered, the entered
value will not be enabled.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Default G/W
=XXX.0.0.0

TOP

] button 3 times.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

Default G/W
=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

5- 14

Store Setting is displayed.

Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Performing the TCP/IP Protocol Settings
Remote UI, the software application built into the network
interface of this printer, allows you to use a Web browser on
your computer to monitor the status of the printer and
perform the network information settings for the printer.

Setting up with a Web Browser (Remote UI)
The procedure below describes how to use Remote UI to
perform the network information settings.

TOP

Note
z When the Remote UI is running with the printer name,
make sure that the DNS settings for the DNS
environment and board have been set up correctly.

Start the Web Browser, enter the following
URL for the Location or the Address, then
press the Enter key.
http:///
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/

Important
z For the Web Browser, use Netscape Navigator/
Communicator 6.0 or later, or use Internet Explorer
5.01 or later. The Safari web browser for the Macintosh
is not compatible.
z The connection cannot be set up through a proxy
server. If the network environment employs a proxy
server, in the Web Browser proxy server settings add
the IP address of the printer to the Exceptions
(addresses not used by the proxy). (The settings may
differ depending on the environment.)
z In the Web Browser perform the settings so JavaScript
and cookies can be used.
z If more than one remote UI is being used, then the
most recent settings remain enabled. Starting and
using only one Remote UI at a time is recommended.
Starting and using only one Remote UI at a time is
recommended.

5- 15

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Click and select Administrator Mode then
click the Logon button.

TOP
Select Network in the Device Manager
menu on the left.

English is set as the default display language for the
Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then
click the Logon button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The Network page appears.

The Remote UI starts.

Click the Edit... button to the right of TCP/IP
protocol.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Note
z If a password has been set for the printer, enter the
password and then click the Logon button. If no
password has been set, then no password entry is
required.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

The Edit TCP/IP Protocol Settings page opens.

5- 16

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Perform the settings for each item.

If the IP address is to be acquired automatically,
click on the check box for the method to be used:
Use DHCP, Use BOOTP, or Use RARP. Remove all
three of the checkmarks if you specify the IP
address.

5- 17

TOP

Note
z With DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP used to set the IP
address setting when the printer starts up, or when it is
reset, a query determines whether DHCP, BOOTP, or
RARP can be used, then the first setting method that
can be recognized and used to assign the IP address.
If the check box for Use DHCP, Use BOOTP, or Use
RARP is clicked off, the check is not performed with
that function.
If any of the items cannot be used, then the setting for
IP Address is assigned as the IP address.
z The check to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or
RARP can be used requires about 1 or 2 minutes to
execute. Clicking off the check boxes for a method that
cannot be used is recommended.
z When DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP is used to assign the
IP address, the server in the network that uses this
protocol must be running.
z If you are using a DNS server, click the Enable DNS
Dynamic Update check box on, and then enter the
Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS
Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain
Name.
z Enter the text or hyphen (-) for the name of the host in
the DNS Host Name box (Limit: 63 characters).
However, you cannot enter a number or hyphen at the
beginning of the name or enter a hyphen at the end of
the name.
z Enter characters, hyphens, or periods for the DNS
Domain Name (Limit: 64 characters). However, you
cannot enter a number, hyphen, or period at the
beginning of the name or enter a hyphen or period at
the end of the name.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

6
7

TOP

Click the OK button.

Setting the Printer for Sharing

When you return to Network under Device
Manager, press the Reset button.

Performing the print server settings in the following procedure
for a network set up with Windows Server 2003, Windows XP,
Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, greatly improves the
efficiency of managing the network printer. After you set up the
print server, print jobs are managed by the print server. Also, if
you install alternate drivers for the print server beforehand,
each computer can install the printer driver via the network.

Important
z The printer share settings should be performed by the
network system administrator. These settings cannot
be done on a Windows 98 server.

1
The printer network interface restarts and enables
the settings.

Open the Sharing sheet of the Printer
Properties dialog box.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Click the Start button then select Settings >
Printers.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Click the icon of the printer to use, then from the
File menu select Sharing.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 18

Index

TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)

Perform the settings for printer sharing.
Select Shared as then enter the desired name
of the printer for sharing.
Click the Additional Drivers... button (click the
Alternate Drivers button in Windows NT 4.0)
and select the printer driver to install.
Press the OK button. A screen appears so you
can select the location of the printer driver files
when you install additional (alternative) drivers,
so mount the User Software CD-ROM provided
for this printer in the CD-ROM drive and select
the folder.

To install the printer driver on other computers, when you
select Network Printer on the Printer Wizard screen for the
selection of the destination for the printer connection, be
sure to select the printer set up for sharing by the print
server.

Note
z If the printer is shared where IIS is installed on
Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, or Windows
2000, install DSE (Device Status Extension) stored
on the provided User Software CD-ROM so you can
use the Web Browser on the client computer to
manage information displays and print jobs. For more
details about how to install DSE, refer to the
Readme.txt in the DSE file located in the DSE folder
on the User Software CD-ROM.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Important
z If you are using Windows NT 4.0 you will need Service
Pack 6 or later for Windows NT installed on the
computer in order to use the alternate drivers function.
This completes the settings for printer sharing.

5- 19

Contents
Index

Macintosh Network Settings

TOP

Macintosh Network Settings
This section describes how to connect to a network using
AppleTalk, IP Print, Canon IP (GARO) and Zeroconf and
how to perform the settings so the printer can be used.

The following procedure should be performed by the
network system administrator.
1

Installing the network interface board

Connecting the LAN Cable

Guide

→ P.5-5

Connect the LAN port to the HUB with the LAN cable.
3

Setting a Macintosh

→ P.5-21

• Confirm the network settings for the Macintosh.

5- 20

Install the Printer Driver

→ P.5-31

Follow the procedure in the Quick Start Guide to
install Canon imagePROGRAF printer driver on the
Macintosh.

→ Quick Start

First, install the optional network interface board.
2

→ P.5-25

Enable the AppleTalk protocol to connect the printer
via AppleTalk. Set the IP address on the printer
operation panel then use the Web browser to set the
protocol for the printer name and zone settings and IP
Print or Canon IP (GARO) connection.
• Web Browser (Remote UI)
• Printer operation panel

Procedures Required for a Macintosh
Network
Here is a summary of the procedures required to set the
printer for use on a Macintosh network.

Setting AppleTalk Protocol

Note
z Here we will describe as an example connection to a
Macintosh computer with its built-in, standard Ethernet
port. If you are installing a expansion network interface
board or a wireless LAN, be sure to select the name of
that port.
z If you are using Mac OS 8.6/9x, you can use the
printer on an IP Print network. IP Print uses the TCP/
IP protocol. If the TCP/IP settings are enabled with IP
Print (Auto) then the printer can be used by simply
connecting it to the LAN. If the printer is connected
with an IP Printer, first register the IP Address
(Chooser > Registering IP Address) then select the
IP Printer and the printer name.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Macintosh Network Settings

z If you are using Mac OS Ver. 10.1 or later, you can use
the printer on a Canon IP (GARO) network. Canon IP
(GARO) uses the TCP/IP protocol. The printer can be
used as soon as the TCP/IP settings are enabled
between the Macintosh computer and the printer and
the printer IP address has been defined.
z If you are using Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later, you can
use the Zeroconf function to connect. Zeroconf uses
the TCP/IP protocol. As soon the TCP/IP settings are
enabled for the Macintosh computer, the printer can be
used by simply connecting it to the LAN. Zeroconf (the
abbreviation for Zero Configuration) is network
technology that requires neither an IP address nor a
DNS service name.

TOP
Setting a Macintosh
Setting the AppleTalk Network Functions

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x
Use Chooser and the AppleTalk item of Control Panel
to confirm the Macintosh network settings.

Confirm that AppleTalk can be used.
From the Apple menu select Chooser.
Confirm that Active is selected for AppleTalk.
If Inactive is selected, select Active.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 21

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

Confirm that Ethernet is selected for the
AppleTalk connection.
Start AppleTalk on Control Panel.
Select Ethernet.

TOP
z For Mac OS X
Confirm the AppleTalk settings with Network of System
Preferences.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

1
2
3

At the Show setting select Built-in Ethernet.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Select the AppleTalk sheet and confirm that
Make AppleTalk Active is selected.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Close AppleTalk to save the setting.

Open Network under System Preferences.

If this item is not checked, select it and then click the
Apply Now button.

This completes the AppleTalk network settings for a
Macintosh.

Important
z Be sure to select the Printer Port if Ethernet is
connected via LocalTalk.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Close Network to save the settings.

Contents

This completes the AppleTalk network settings for a
Macintosh.

5- 22

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

TCP/IP Network Function Settings
Confirm the operating system TCP/IP function settings
when using the Remote UI and IP Print connection,
Canon IP (GARO) connection, or Zeroconf function connection.

TOP
Confirm that TCP/IP is selected for the
Ethernet connection.
Start TCP/IP on Control Panel.
For the Connect via select Ethernet.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x
Use Chooser and the TCP/IP on the Control Panel confirm the TCP/IP network settings.

Important
z If a fixed IP address has already been allocated to
your Macintosh computer, please use that assigned
setting. No setting is required. For more details about
network settings, please contact your network system
administrator.
z If the computer is connected to the printer with IP Print
(Auto), then the computer and the printer must be
connected to the same network as the router. The
computer cannot be connected through a router to a
printer on another network.For more details about
network settings, please contact your network system
administrator.
z If the DHCP server cannot be recognized when Using
DHCP Server is selected, then 169.254.xxx.xxx is set
as the Link Local Address.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Set Using DHCP Server for Configur.
Close TCP/IP to save the setting.
This completes the TCP/IP network settings for a Macintosh.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 23

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

z For Mac OS X
Confirm the TCP/IP settings at Network under System
Preferences.

TOP
Select the TCP/IP panel and confirm the
enabled IP address, subnet mask, and router
settings.

Important
z If the computer is connected to the printer with
Zeroconf, then the computer and the printer must be
connected to the same network as the router. The
computer cannot be connected with the Zeroconf
function through the router to a printer on another
network. For more details about network settings,
please contact your network system administrator.
z If the DHCP server cannot be recognized when Using
DHCP is selected, then 169.254.xxx.xxx is set as the
Link Local Address.

1
2

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Open Network under System Preferences.
At the Show setting select Built-in Ethernet.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Close Network to save the settings.

This completes the TCP/IP network settings for a Macintosh.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 24

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

Setting AppleTalk Protocol
The AppleTalk protocol of this printer is set to disable before
the printer is shipped. Enable the AppleTalk protocol to
connect the printer via AppleTalk. The printer protocol
settings can be set with either a Web browser (Remote UI)
or the printer operation panel. This setting is not required if
connected with IP Print, Canon IP (GARO), or Zeroconf.

z Remote UI (→ P.5-25)
On a Macintosh computer where the TCP/IP setting is
completed, you can use a Web browser to perform the
AppleTalk settings. To perform the settings, first enter the
IP address with the printer operation panel, then use the
Web browser to set the protocol. (→ P.5-25)

z Printer operation panel (→ P.5-30)
You can perform the AppleTalk settings on the printer
operation panel.

Important
z Before AppleTalk settings, confirm that the printer is
switched on and connected to the network.

TOP
Setting the Protocol with Web Browser
(Remote UI)
Important
z For the Web Browser, use Netscape Navigator/
Communicator 6.0 or later, or use Internet Explorer
5.01 or later. The Safari web browser for the Macintosh
is not compatible.
z The connection cannot be set up through a proxy
server. If the network environment employs a proxy
server, in the Web Browser proxy server settings add
the IP address of the printer to the Exceptions
(addresses not used by the proxy). (The settings may
differ depending on the environment.)
z In the Web Browser perform the settings so JavaScript
and cookies can be used.
z If more than one remote UI is being used, then the
most recent settings remain enabled. Starting and
using only one Remote UI at a time is recommended.
Note
z When the Remote UI is running with the printer name,
make sure that the DNS settings for the DNS
environment and board have been set up correctly.
z Follow the procedure below to start Remote UI on a
system using Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later and the
Zeroconf function to connect the printer.
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility (Print Center).
2. Select the name of this printer from the print list
and click the Set button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 25

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

Start the Web Browser, enter the following
URL for the Location or the Address, then
press the Enter key.
http:///
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/

Select Administrator Mode then click the
Logon button.

TOP
Note
z If a password has been set for the printer, enter the
password and then click the Logon button. If no
password has been set, then no password entry is
required.

Select Network in the Device Manager
menu on the left.

English is set as the default display language for the
Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then
click the Logon button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The Network page appears.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

The Remote UI starts.

Contents

5- 26

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

To perform the AppleTalk protocol settings,
click the Edit... button to the right of
AppleTalk.

TOP
For Phase Type, select Phase 2.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

The Edit AppleTalk Protocol Settings page is
displayed.
If connected with the IP Print (Auto) (Mac OS 8.6/
9x) function or Zeroconf Mac OS X function, go to
the Step 9.

Note
z If Disabled is selected, the printer will not be
recognized on the AppleTalk network.

For Name enter the name of the printer on
the network.
Enter the printer name displayed in Chooser (Mac
OS 8.6/9.x) or the name displayed in Setup Utility
(Print Center) (Mac OS X).

Important
z If more than one printer is in the same zone, be sure to
assign a unique name for each printer.
Note
z The initial (default) network interface name is Canon
NB 15FB (xxxxxx). Where xxxxxx is the 6-digit MAC
address of the printer.

5- 27

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Macintosh Network Settings

z To change Name, enter a 15-character name.
However, these symbols and characters are not
permitted: @ * : =

TOP
If you are using the Zeroconf function for the
printer connection, click the Edit... button to
the right of TCP/IP.

When a zone is set on the network, enter the
name of zone where the printer belongs.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

If no zone is set, then leave the asterisk (*) entry as
it is.

Important
z The zone name must be the name of a zone that is
already entered. If you enter the name of a zone that is
not yet set, the recognition of the printer by the
Macintosh will be lost. For more details about zone
names, please contact your network system
administrator.

Click the OK button.
If you are using AppleTalk only, go to Step 13.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

The Edit TCP/IP Protocol Setting page opens.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 28

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

Click the Use Zeroconf Function check box
on.

12
13

TOP
Click the OK button.
When you return to the Network screen of
Device Manager, click the Reset button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The printer network interface restarts and enables
the settings.
This completes the protocol settings for the printer.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Enter the name of the printer on the network
into the Multicast DNS Service Name box.
Enter the printer name displayed in Chooser (Mac
OS 8.6/9.x) or the name displayed in Print Setup
Utility (Print Center) (Mac OS X).

Note
z You can change the Multicast DNS Service name with
up to 63 characters (including hyphens, spaces).

5- 29

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Macintosh Network Settings

Setting with the Printer Operation Panel
You can use the printer operation panel to select AppleTalk protocol.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Interface Setup

↓

Use [ ] or [
press [ ].

] to select AppleTalk then

Press the OK button.
If you want to cancel the setting, press Stop button
for at least 1 second.
Store Setting
OK?

The printer restarts after Storing appears on the
display.
When completed, the printer returns to the Online or
Offline mode.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Interface Set
AppleTalk

Online

TOP

↓

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

] to select On, then press

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

AppleTalk
On

Press the [
Interface Setup
AppleTalk

5- 30

] button.
↓

Contents
Index

Macintosh Network Settings

Install the Printer Driver
After completing the printer protocol settings, install the
printer driver on every Macintosh that will be used for
printing and perform the print destination settings.

1
2

TOP
Make sure that the printer is on.
After the Macintosh has restarted, open
Finder and select Utilities or Applications
from the Go menu.

Installing the Printer Driver
In order for the printer to operate, a printer driver compatible with the printer must be installed. Install the Printer
Driver (→ Quick Start Guide)

Selecting the printer with the Chooser completes the
settings. The Destination can select AppleTalk, IP
Print, or IP Print (Auto). (→ Quick Start Guide)

Open the Utilities folder then open Printer
Setup Utility (Print Center).

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

z For Mac OS X
For Mac OS X, open the printer setup utility (Print Center), and then add the name of the printer under Add
Printer. For the Destination select AppleTalk, Canon
IP (GARO) or Zeroconf.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Selecting a Printer
z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

If the name of the printer is not in the Printer
List, click the Add icon.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 31

Index

Macintosh Network Settings

From the connection destination menu,
select AppleTalk, Canon IP (GARO), or
Zeroconf for the network connection, click
the name of the printer in the displayed list,
then click the Add button.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

This completes the selection of the printer.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 32

Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

TOP

NetWare Settings (Windows)
The chapter describes the setting methods and procedures
for connecting the printer to a NetWare network.

Installing the Network Interface
Board

→ Quick Start
Guide

First, install the optional network interface board.
2

Connecting the LAN Cable

→ P.5-5

Connect the LAN port to the HUB with the LAN cable.
3

Setting the Printer Frame Type

→ P.5-34

Perform the printer frame type setting. Use the
software below to setup communication between your
computer and the printer.
• GARO Device Setup Utility (Canon utility provided with the printer)
• Printer Operation Panel

Setting NetWare Protocol

→ P.5-40

Perform the printer protocol settings. You can use a
Web Browser from a computer on the network to
perform the network settings.
• Web Browser (Remote UI)

The following procedure should be performed by the
network system administrator.
1

→ P.5-37

Perform the NetWare printer service settings. Use
one of the utilities below to perform the settings on
the computer.
• NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software
application provided with NetWare)

Procedures Required for a NetWare
Network
Here is a summary of the procedures required to set the
printer for use on a NetWare network.

Setting Up a NetWare Print Service

Setting the Computer for NetWare

→ P.5-44

Perform these settings on every computer to be used
with the printer.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 33

Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Setting the Printer Frame Type
Before setting the printer protocol, you must set the frame
type to enable communication between the printer and the
computer. Use the utility below to perform this setting.

z GARO Device Setup Utility (→ P.5-34)
z Printer operation panel (→ P.5-35)

TOP
Setting the frame type with GARO Device
Setup Utility
If you are using Windows, use the GARO Device Setup
Utility, the software utility provided with the printer, to
perform the printer network settings.

Important
z In order to use GARO Device Setup Utility, it must be
installed on your computer. Install GARO Device Setup
Utility on your computer. (→ P.5-34)
z Before setting the printer frame type, confirm that the
printer is switched on and connected to the network.

On the desktop, click the Start button, point
to Programs, then select GARO Device
Setup Utility > GARO Device Setup Utility.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Select from the list the name of the printer
you want to set, then select Protocol
Settings from the Printer menu.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 34

Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Select the type of frame you are using for
NetWare Frame Type, select ETHERNET II
for TCP/IP Frame Type, enter the assigned
settings for IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Gateway Address, then click the Set button.

TOP
When you are finished performing the
settings, select Exit from the Printer menu.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Setting with the Printer Operation Panel
The NetWare network information can be set on the
printer operation panel.

Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning

Note
z The IP address setting is required here to allow the
printer protocol setting to be performed with the Web
browser (Remote UI).

Click the OK button when the confirmation
message is displayed.

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Online

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Interface Setup

Press [
press [
Interface Setup
NetWare

5- 35

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

↓

] or [
].

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

] to select NetWare, then

Contents
↓

Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Press [
press [

] or [
].

NetWare
NetWare

Press [ ] or [
OK button.

] to select Netware, then

8
9

NetWare
On

After the equals mark (=) appears on the left, the
display returns to the NetWare menu.

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Frame Type,
then press [ ].
NetWare
Frame Type

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select the setting for the
frame type to use then press OK button.
The available frame type selections are Auto
Detect, Ethernet 2, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3
and Ethernet SNAP.
Frame Type
Ethernet 802.3

After the equals mark (=) appears on the left, the
display returns to the NetWare menu.

Press [ ] or [ ] to select Print Service,
then press [ ].
NetWare
Print Service

↓

] to select On, then press

TOP

↓

Press [ ] or [ ] to select the print service
then press [ ].

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

The available selections for Print Service are
BindaryPserver, RPrinter, NDSPserver, and
NPrinter.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Print Service
RPrinter

After the equals mark (=) appears on the left, the
display returns to the NetWare menu.

Press the [
NetWare
Print Service

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

] button twice.
↓

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Press the OK button.
If you want to cancel the setting, press Stop button
for at least 1 second.
Store Setting
OK?

The printer restarts after Storing appears on the
display.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

When completed, the printer returns to the Online or
Offline mode.

5- 36

Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Setting Up a NetWare Print Service
A print service for the print server, queue, and so on, must
be set up before you can use a NetWare network to print.
Use one of the following software applications to perform
the print service settings from your computer. Use
whichever is easiest to perform the settings.

z NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software
applications provided with NetWare)
Important
z If you perform the print service settings with
NWADMIN, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client)
must be installed as the client software application.
z The procedure described here is for the NetWare print
service settings. The procedure may be different in the
environment that you are using.

Types of Print Services
Before performing the print service settings, be sure to
read the description below then select the printer service
type.

Note
z You can use NDPS as the print service with NetWare
5.1/6.0. When you use NDPS, use the Novell printer
gateway provided by NetWare as the gateway. The
setup procedure for NDPS is not described in this
guide, so for more details refer to the NetWare
instructions.

5- 37

TOP
z NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery
Either NDS or Bindery is supported. Select the mode
that is best suited for your network environment.
z Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
Both Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
are supported.
z Queue Server Mode
When Queue Server Mode is used, all of the print
server functions are provided so no other hardware for
the print service is required. The printer and computer
use the NDS print server in the NDS Queue Mode
(NDS PServer). The printer and computer use the
Bindery print server in the Bindery Queue Mode (Bindery PServer).
Also, a NetWare user license is required for each network interface used in the Queue Server Mode.
z Remote Printer Mode
If you use the Remote Printer Mode, the NetWare print
server exercises control. For this reason, the NetWare
print service is required. Use the NDS print server in
NDS Remote Printer Mode (NPrinter) to print, and use
the Bindery print server in the Bindery Print Mode
(RPrinter) to print.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Setting Up the Print Server With
NWADMIN, PCONSOLE
z If You Are Using NDS Queue Server Mode or
Remote Printer Mode

1
2

Log into NetWare as the System
Administrator, or as a user with equivalent
access rights, then start NWADMIN.
Execute the Quick Setup.

TOP
Note
z You are going to need the name of the print server to
perform the printer protocol settings so be sure to note
the printer name.
z When you perform the Quick Setup, “0” is assigned to
the printer as its number. If you intend to use the
Queue Server Mode, do not change the printer
number.

Select the print server created in Step 2, then
right-click Details.

Select Print Services Quick Setup from the
Tools menu.

Click the Change Password button to open the
password entry screen, then enter the desired
password.

Enter a Print Server Name of your choice. If you
want to use an existing server, click the button to
the right of the name to select it from the list.
For the printer Name enter the desired name.
If you intend to use Queue Server Mode, select
Other/Unknown for the Type. If you intend to use
the Remote Printer Mode, select Parallel for
Type, click the Communicate button then select
LPT1 for Port and Manual Load for Connection
Type.
For the print queue Name enter the desired name.
For Volume enter the volume object to create the
queue (the object that appears as the physical
volume on the network). Click the button on the
right to select from the list.
Perform any other settings that are required, then
click the OK button.

5- 38

Set the password.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Click the OK button to close the password entry
screen.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Click the OK or Cancel button to close the
Details screen.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Follow the procedure below to start the print
server when you use the Remote Printer
Mode.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

To use the NetWare file server as the print
server, on the file server enter LOAD
PSERVER.NLM then press the Enter key.

Contents
Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Note
z The step to use the NetWare file server as the print
server, is not required if you intend to use the Queue
Server Mode.
This completes the NetWare print service settings. Next,
perform the printer protocol settings. (→ P.5-40)

2
3

Log into NetWare as the Supervisor, then
start PCONSOLE.

Press the ESC key.

Note
z You are going to need the name of the print server to
perform the printer protocol settings so be sure to note
the printer name.

Set the password.
From Available Options select Print Servers,
then press the Enter key.
Select the print server created in Step 2, then
press the Enter key.

If the print server has not been created,
perform the following procedure to create the
print server.

Enter the name of the print server to create, the
name of the new printer, and name of the
queue.

5- 39

When the confirmation message appears, click
Yes then press the Enter key.

Switch to the Bindery Mode.

From Available Options select Quick Setup
then press the Enter key.

Set the printer type.
If you intend to use Queue Server Mode, select
Other/Unknown for the Type. If you intend to
use the Remote Printer Mode, under Printer
Type select Parallel then set Manual Load for
the Location.

z If You Are Using the Bindery Queue Server
Mode or Remote Printer Mode

TOP

Select Password, then press the Enter key.
When the password entry screen opens, enter
the desired password, then press the Enter
key.

Press ESC several times to display the
confirmation to close PCONSOLE, then click
Yes to close PCONSOLE.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

This completes the NetWare print service settings. Next,
perform the printer protocol settings. (→ P.5-40)

Contents
Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Setting NetWare Protocol

The printer protocol settings can be set with a Web browser
(Remote UI) from your computer. Set the IP address before
you perform these settings. (→ P.5-7)

Setting the Protocol with Web Browser
(Remote UI)
Important
z For the Web Browser, use Netscape Navigator/
Communicator 6.0 or later, or use Internet Explorer 5.01
or later.
z The connection cannot be set up through a proxy server.
If the network environment employs a proxy server, in the
Web Browser proxy server settings add the IP address of
the printer to the Exceptions (addresses not used by the
proxy). (The settings may differ, depending on the
network environment.)
z In the Web Browser perform the settings so JavaScript
and cookies can be used.
z If more than one remote UI is being used, then the most
recently used settings remain enabled. Starting and using
only one Remote UI at a time is recommended.
Note
z When the Remote UI is running with the printer name,
make sure that the DNS settings for the DNS
environment and board have been set up correctly.
z When print history is displayed with RPrinter/NPrinter
with the Remote UI running, the Document Name and
User information cannot be acquired. For this reason
the Document Name is set to Unknown the User is
set to RPRINTER/NPRINTER (only these settings are
displayed).

5- 40

TOP
Start the Web Browser, enter the following
URL for the Location or the Address, then
press the Enter key.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

http:///
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/

Click and select Administrator Mode then
click the OK button.
English is set as the default display language for the
Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then
click the Logon button.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

The Remote UI starts.

Note
z If a password has been set for the printer, enter the
password and then click the Logon button. If no
password has been set, then no password entry is
required.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Select Network in the Device Manager
menu on the left.

TOP
Check the Frame Type box and make sure
the setting is correct for your NetWare
network.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

The Network page appears.

Click the Edit... button to the right of
NetWare.

If you intend to use the burst mode, select
On for NCP Burst Mode.

Note
z The burst mode is used in the queue server mode to
transfer data rapidly at very high speed during printing.
z Normally, leave the setting on.

The Edit IPX/SPX Protocol Settings page appears.

5- 41

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

For Print Application select the service to
use.

Note
z Here we will show only one service selected and
enabled. More than one service cannot be enabled at
the same time.

When using the packet signature settings, for
Packet Signature be sure to select If
Requested by Server.

TOP
Perform the following settings as required for
the selected service.
z Bindery PServer Selected: Queue Server Mode
(Using a Bindery Print Server)
Enter the file server name into File Server
Name.
For Print Server Name, enter the name of the
print server created in “Setting Up a NetWare
Print Service” (→ P.5-37).
For Print Server Password, enter the print
server password created in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37).
Set the Polling Interval. Set the time interval
for the printer to confirm the NetWare print
queue.
z RPrinter Selected: Remote Printer Mode (using a
Bindery Print Server)
For Print Server Name, enter the advertised
name of the print server created in “Setting Up
a NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37).
For Printer Number, enter the same printer
number that you entered in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37).

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 42

Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

z NDS PServer Selected: Queue Server Mode
(Using an NDS Print Server)

TOP
When you return to Network under Device
Manager, press the Reset button.

Enter the Tree Name and Context Name for
the tree and context name of the print server.
Enter a context name of less than 255
characters.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

For Print Server Name, enter the name of the
print server created in “Setting Up a NetWare
Print Service” (→ P.5-37).
For Print Server Password, enter the print
server password created in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37).
Set the Polling Interval. Set the time interval
for the printer to confirm the NetWare print
queue.
z NPrinter Selected: Remote Printer Mode (using an
NDS Print Server)
For Print Server Name, enter the advertised
name of the print server created in “Setting Up
a NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37). The
advertised name and common name of the
printer is set the same.
For Printer Number, enter the same printer
number that you entered in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37).

10
5- 43

Click the OK button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

The printer network interface restarts and enables
the settings.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

This completes the NetWare protocol settings.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

NetWare Settings (Windows)

Setting the Computer for NetWare
Perform these settings for each computer after you have
selected the NetWare print service and protocol.

Connecting to a NetWare Network
Install NetWare client software on all the computers that
will be used to print, then log in to the NetWare server or
tree. For more details about connection methods, refer to
the NetWare or operating system instructions.

Installing the Printer Driver
The printer driver is required for printing. Install the
printer driver under the direction of the network system
administrator.
When you install the printer driver, be sure to select Network Printer and select the print queue that you created
with the NetWare print service settings.

Setting the Printer Port
Press the Start button then select Settings > Printers >
Printer icon > File > Properties. Display either the
Details or Port sheet and specify the print queue you
created with the NetWare print service settings as the
setting for the print destination. (→ P.5-37)

Note
z This procedure is not required if you set the connection
destination for the printer during the installation of the
printer driver.

5- 44

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Printing with UNIX

TOP

Printing with UNIX
Using LPD to Print
This section describes printing with LPD.

1
2

Log into the root of the work station.
Set up the spooling system.
z Example Using Solaris 9:
Start the Admintool utility.
Select Browse > Printers.
Select Edit > Add > Access to Printer.
Following the format restrictions, enter the
Printer Name and Print Server name.
Press the OK button.
z Example Using Red Hat Linux
Start the Printer Configuration utility on the
control panel.
Select Add > Other UNIX (lpd) queue > OK.
For the Printer Name, Remote Host, Remote
Queue enter the desired print queue name,
printer IP address or name, and lp.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

If a filter is to be used, select the filter.
If there is no filter for the printer, you can temporarily
select any filter, shut down the Printer Configuration
Utility, and then change the postscript.cfg file in the
spool directory so it matches your printer. For more
details, please refer to the Ghostscript descriptions.

Note
z The Admintool Utility is provided with the operating
system. For more details about how to use this utility,
please refer to the operating system instructions.
z The setting procedure above is an example. The
procedure may be different in the environment that you
are using.
z This completes the printing settings.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 45

Index

Printing with UNIX

Using FTP to Print

Start at the MS-DOS prompt or command
line.
If you are using UNIX, open the Console screen.

Execute the following commands.
ftp

Enter any user name.
Just press the Enter key without entering a
password.
You can perform the procedure below.
•To print a file:
put

Note
z Print the file in binary mode.

TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 46

Index

Initializing the Settings

Initializing the Settings
Follow the procedure below to use the Web browser
(Remote UI) to restore all the network settings to the default
values set before shipping the printer from the factory.

Note
z In addition to using the Web browser to restore the
initial settings, you can also use GARO Device Setup
Utility or the printer operation panel to restore the
network default settings.

Start the Web Browser, enter the following
URL for the Location or the Address, then
press the Enter key.
http:///
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/

Click and select Administrator Mode then
click the Logon button.
English is set as the default display language for the
Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then
click the Logon button.
The Remote UI starts.

Note
z If a password has been set for the printer, enter the
password and then click the OK button. If no password
has been set, then no password entry is required.

5- 47

TOP

3
4
5

From the Device Manager menu on the left,
select Network.
Click the Reset to Default settings button.
Confirm the message then click the OK
button.
All the network information is restored to the factory
default settings.

Note
z When you initialize all the network settings, the printer
IP address is also restored to its factory default
(0.0.0.0) so the Remote UI screen cannot be displayed
in the browser again. Use the GARO Device Setup
Utility or the printer operation panel when you need to
perform the network settings again.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

List of Network Settings

TOP

List of Network Settings
If you are using a Web Browser (Remote UI), you can
change the settings of the network interface. The settings
that can be changed are listed in the tables below.

Item
Device Name
Location
Administrator
Phone
Comment
(E-mail)
Administrator
Password

TCP/IP Settings
Item

General Settings
Content
Device name
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Device location
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Device Administrator Name
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Telephone number of
Administrator for the device
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Comments of the Device
Administrator
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Device password
(Range: 0 to 15 chars.)

Initial
Value
Blank

Use DHCP

Use BOOTP

Blank
Use RARP
Blank
Blank

RAW Mode Bidirection

Blank

DNS Dynamic
Update

Blank

Use Zeroconf
function
IP Address

Content
The setting in the IP address
that determines whether
DHCP is used
The setting in the IP address
that determines whether
BOOTP is used
The setting in the IP address
that determines whether
RARP is used
Determines whether bidirectional communication is
used for RAW mode.
Determines whether DNS
Server Registration Update
is Automatic.
Determines whether
Zeroconf function is used.

Gateway
Address

The IP address of the printer
The subnet mask of the
printer.
The gateway address of the
printer.

Primary DNS
Server Address

IP Address of primary DNS
server

Subnet mask

5- 48

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Initial
Value
OFF

OFF

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

OFF

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

OFF

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

ON
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

0.0.0.0

Index

List of Network Settings

Item
Secondary DNS
Server Address

Content
Secondary DNS Server IP
Address.

Printer Host Name
DNS Host Name
(Range: 1 to 63 chars.)
DNS Domain
Name
Multicast DNS
Service Name

Printer Domain Name
(Range: 0 to 64 chars.)
Printer Multicast DNS
Service Name
(Range: 1 to 63 chars.)

TOP
Initial
Value
0.0.0.0
NB-15FB
xxxxxxxxx
xxx
Blank
Canon
W6400P
G (xxxxxx)

AppleTalk Settings
Item
Phase Type

Name

Zone

NetWare Settings
Item
Frame Type

Determines whether the NCP
burst mode is used.
NCP Burst Mode
(Normally, leave this setting
on.)
The print service to use.
Print Application (Only one print service can
be selected and enabled.)
Packet
Signature

Content

Initial
Value

The name of the phase type
in use (determines whether
Disabled
AppleTalk is used.)
The names of the printers
Canon
displayed in the Chooser and
NB-15FB
Printer Center lists
(xxxxxx)
(Name length: 1 to 31 chars.)
The name of the printer zone
*
(Name length: 1 to 31 chars.)

Determines whether the
packet sign is used
(normally leave set to If
Requested by Server)

Initial Value
Disabled

NDS
PServer

If Requested
by Server

File Server
Name
Print Server
Name
Printer Server
Password

Name of the NetWare file
server of the NetWare print
server.
(Range: 0 to 47 chars.)
The name of the NetWare
print server in use.
(Range: 0 to 47 chars.)
The password required by
the print server setting.
(0 to 20 chars.)
The time interval between job
confirmations.
(Range: 1 to 15 sec.)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Bindery PServer

Polling Interval

5- 49

Content
The frame type used by
NetWare.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Blank

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Blank

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Blank

Contents
Index

List of Network Settings

Item
RPrinter
Print Server
Name

Printer Number

Content
The name of the NetWare
print server in use.
(Range: 0 to 47 chars.)
The number used for the
printer connection to the
NetWare print server.
(Range: 0 to 15)

TOP
Initial Value
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Blank

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

NDS PServer
Tree Name

Context Name
Print Server
Name
Printer Server
Password
Polling Interval

The name of the NDS tree of
the NetWare print server.
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
The name of the context of
the NetWare Print server.
(Range: 0 to 255 chars.)
The name of the NetWare
print server in use.
(Range: 0 to 64 chars.)
The password required by
the print server setting.
(0 to 20 chars.)
The time interval between job
confirmations.
(Range: 1 to 255 sec.)

Blank

Printer Number

5- 50

The name of the NetWare
print server in use.
(Range: 0 to 64 chars.)
The number used for the
printer connection to the
NetWare print server.
(Range: 0 to 254)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Blank

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Blank

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

NPrinter
Print Server
Name

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Blank

Contents
0

Index

Software Applications that can be used for Network Settings

TOP

Software Applications that can be used for Network Settings
Use the following listed software to perform the network settings.

Type of Setting

GARO Device Web Browser
Setup Utility
(Remote UI)

ARP/PING
command

Printer
operation
panel

Setting IP Addresses
(→ P.5-7)
Set TCP/IP protocol
(→ P.5-15)

Setting AppleTalk protocol
(→ P.5-25)

Setting the NetWare printer
service
(→ P.5-37)
Setting the NetWare protocol
(→ P.5-40)

*1. Only these settings are allowed: IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DHCP,
BOOTP, RAPP, frame type, phase settings.
*2. Only phase settings are possible.
*3. Only frame type are possible.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

5- 51

Index

TOP

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
Click on the checkbox to print the section contents.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Responding to Error Messages ..................................................................6-2
Operation Panel Message List .............................................................................. 6-3
Media Messages ................................................................................................... 6-4
Ink Messages ...................................................................................................... 6-11
Other Messages .................................................................................................. 6-14

When You Cannot Print ............................................................................6-18
Printing Will Not Start .......................................................................................... 6-18
Printing Halts During Print Job ............................................................................ 6-21
Cannot Print on Network ..................................................................................... 6-22

Unexpected Printing Results ....................................................................6-27
Poor Quality ......................................................................................................... 6-28
Abnormal Content ................................................................................................ 6-31
Other Problems ................................................................................................... 6-34

Handling Jams ..........................................................................................6-35
Removing a Roll Media Jam ................................................................................ 6-35
Removing a Cut Sheet Jam ................................................................................. 6-38

Updating the Firmware .............................................................................6-41
Obtaining the Firmware Update ........................................................................... 6-41
Confirming the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 6-41

Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver ................................................6-42
Uninstalling Software Applications ...........................................................6-43
Deleting the Printer Driver ................................................................................... 6-43
Deleting the GARO Status Monitor ...................................................................... 6-44
Deleting the GARO Device Setup Utility .............................................................. 6-44

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 1

How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages

Start Print → Before clicking the Start Print button

Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Responding to Error Messages
When the printer requires attention, messages are displayed on the operation panel and in the GARO Status Monitor
(Windows) or GARO Printmonitor (Macintosh).
• Operation Panel

• GARO Status Monitor (Windows)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Information Power
Data
Message

Error!
E02010
Media Skewed

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Online

Offline
Menu

Follow the procedures on the following pages to confirm
and solve problems indicated by the messages.

Read the displayed message and perform the appropriate procedure.

Note
z The printer status cannot be displayed with a USB connection to Mac OS X.
z If the GARO Status Monitor is not installed on Windows, look at the message on the printer operation panel.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 2

Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Operation Panel Message List
Media Messages

Ink Messages

Other Messages

Load Roll Media

Check Ink Level

Remove Roll Media

Rep. Ink Tank

Close xxx Cover (xxx name of the
cover)
Reset Lever

End of Roll
RllMed.Shortage
Replace RllMed.
Load Cut Sheet

No Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank

Check Head Hght L/M/H → L/M/H

Check Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank

Turn Power Off!!

Not Enough Ink

No Printhead

Remove Cut Sheet

Ink level?

Printhead Error!

Eject Cut Sheet

Remove Ink Tank

Check Printhead

Incorrect Media

Chk Bk Ink Type

Scale Read Error

Med.SizeNoMatch

MTCart Full Soon

Mist Full Soon

No Borderless

Replace MT-Cart

Mist Count Error

Illegal Med Pos

No MT-Cartridge

Adj. Failed

NoBordlessData

Check MT-Cart.

Incorrect Value

Size undetected

ERROR nnnnnn (n = Numbers)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Media Skewed
Media Too Large
Media Too Small

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Media Jam
Cut Failed
Drying..
Feed Limit..

Contents

Cut by Stop key

6- 3

Index

Responding to Error Messages

Media Messages
Load Roll Media

TOP
Remove Roll Media
Problem1: The printer is waiting for you to remove the
ejected roll media.

Problem1: The printer is waiting for you to load the roll
media.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Solution1: Follow the procedure below set the Media Type
and Media Size settings the same as those for
the roll media. (→ P.2-26)
1. Load a roll with media that is the same type
and size as the printer settings.
2. Select the media type.
3. Select length if the media remaining detection
feature for roll media is on.
4. Press the OK button.
Solution2: Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least 1
second to stop printing.

Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the roll.
1. Open the upper cover.
2. Push the release lever to the rear and
remove the roll.
3. Pull the release lever toward you to close it.
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 4

Index

Responding to Error Messages

End of Roll
Problem1: The roll media has run out.

TOP
RllMed.Shortage
Replace RllMed.
Problem1: The length of the media required for the received
print job is longer than the amount of media
remaining on the roll.

Solution1: Perform the procedure below to load the same
size and type of roll media in use. (→ P.2-26)
1. Load the size and type of roll in use.
2. Select the media type.
3. Select length if the media remaining detection
feature for roll media is on.
4. Press the OK button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Solution1: Follow the procedure below to load a new roll in
the printer. (→ P.2-26)
1. Load a new roll of the size and type to be
used.
2. Select the Media Type.
3. If the roll remaining media function is on,
select the length of the media.
4. Press the OK button.
Solution2: Hold down the Stop/Eject button for more than 1
second to stop printing.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 5

Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Load Cut Sheet

Remove Cut Sheet

Problem1: The printer is waiting for a cut sheet to be
loaded.

Problem1: The printer waits for you to remove the ejected
sheet.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Solution1: Follow the procedure below to set the media
type and media size settings the same as those
for the cut sheet. (→ P.2-35)
1. Load a cut sheet that is the same type and
size as the printer settings.
2. Select the media type.
3. Press the OK button.
Solution2: Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least 1
second to stop printing.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the cut
sheet. (→ P.2-39)
1. Open the upper cover.
2. Push the release lever to the rear and
remove the cut sheet.
3. Pull the release lever to close it.
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 6

Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Eject Cut Sheet

Incorrect Media

Problem1: The printer received print data for the roll media
while a cut sheet was loaded.

Problem1: The media type specified for printing does not
match the setting for the setting for the media in
the feed source.

[Media Type]

Glossy
Photo Paper

The specified
media type
when loaded

Printer driver

Solution1: Perform the procedure below to correct the
media type setting on the printer.
1. Confirm the type of media loaded for the print
job.
2. Enter the confirmed media type on the printer
operation panel. (→ P.2-32)
Solution2: Perform the procedure below to correct the
Media Type setting on the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
2. Use the printer driver to select the media type
so the value matches the loaded media type,
then re-start the print job.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Med.SizeNoMatch
Problem1: A roll of a width that cannot be used with
borderless printing is loaded in the printer.

6- 7

Solution1: Load a roll media of a width that can be used
with borderless printing. (→ P.2-26)

Contents
Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

No Borderless

NoBordlessData

Problem1: The data received cannot be used for borderless
printing.

Solution1: Follow the procedure below to correct the Media
Type setting on the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for 1 second or longer to stop printing.
2. Use the printer driver to confirm size of the
print data and enlargement/reduction settings, then perform printing.

Solution1: Press the Online button to continue borderless
printing.

Problem2: The skew detection function is off.
Solution1: For the selected print media, select Standard or
Loose for Set Skew Check Lv., then load the
media.

Illegal Med Pos
Problem1: The position of the loaded media is incorrect.

Solution2: Do the procedure below to correct the selection
for the media type.
1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
2. Use the printer driver to confirm size of the
print data and enlargement/reduction settings, then perform the print.

Size undetected
Problem1: The media has shifted out of the correct load
position, or the media is curled.

Solution1: Load 10", 14", 16", JIS B2, or ARCH24 roll
paper.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Solution2: Re-set the roll paper correctly on the roll holder.
(→ P.2-26)
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Problem2: The width of the media in the data received for
printing cannot be used with borderless printing.
Solution1: Follow the procedure below to correct the setting
so the printer can print on a media that can be
used for borderless printing.
1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
2. In the printer driver change the setting for
Roll Paper Width to a size that can be used
with borderless printing, then print again.

6- 8

Solution1: Set the media correctly. (→ P.2-26, P.2-35)
Problem2: The printer interior is dusty or dirty.

Contents

Solution1: Open the upper cover and clean inside the
printer. (→ P.4-11)

Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Media Skewed

Media Too Large

Problem1: The loaded media is skewed.

Problem1: The loaded media is larger than any media size
allowed for loading in the printer.
Solution1: Set the correct size media then try again.
(→ P.2-26, P.2-35)

Media Too Small
Problem1: The loaded media is smaller than any media size
allowed for loading in the printer.
Solution1: Perform the procedure below if roll media is in
use. (→ P.2-26)
1. Open the upper cover.
2. Press the release lever to the rear to open.
3. Align the right edge of the roll media with the
line aligned with the right edge of the roll,
then pull the release lever to the front to
close.
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.
5. Select the media type and press the OK button.

6- 9

Solution2: Perform the procedure below if you are using cut
sheets. (→ P.2-35)
1. Open the upper cover.
2. Press the release lever to the rear to open.
3. Align the right edge of the cut sheet with the
right side, align the leading edge of the sheet
inside the printer, then pull the release lever
toward you to close.
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Solution1: Set the correct size media then try again.
(→ P.2-26, P.2-35)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Problem2: Media size smaller than the required size was
set for printing the print pattern or the nozzle
check pattern.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Solution1: Load A3 size media or larger for printing.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Media Jam
Problem1: Media has jammed in the printer.

Error!
E02E01
Turn Power Off!!

Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the
jammed sheet. (→ P.6-35)
1. Switch the printer off.
2. Remove the jammed sheet.
3. Switch the printer on.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Cut Failed

Cut by Stop key

Problem1: Leading edge of the roll media not detected after
cutting.

Problem1: The loaded media cannot be cut automatically.

Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the
jammed sheet. (→ P.2-33)
1. Open the upper cover.
2. Use a cutter to cut the sheet manually and
remove the sheet.
3. Re-load the roll.
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Drying..
Problem1: The printer is waiting for the ink to dry on the
printout.
Solution1: Wait until the printed sheet ejects automatically.

Feed Limit..
Problem1: You pressed [ ] button on the operation panel
to feed more media than allowed.
Solution1: Release the [
media.

Solution1: The printer stops after the print job ends to
protect the printing surface. Support the printout
with your hand to prevent it from falling into the
output stacker, and then press the Stop/Eject
button to cut the printout.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

] button to stop feeding the

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 10

Index

Responding to Error Messages

Ink Messages
Check Ink Level
Problem1: Ink in ink tank is running low.

TOP
No Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank
Problem1: The ink tank of the displayed color is not
installed.
BK PC C PM M

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Solution1: Obtain a new ink tank. If a long print job is in
progress, or if you need to print a job of many
sheets, you should replace the ink tank with a
new one.

Rep. Ink Tank
Problem1: Ink in an ink tank has run out.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Solution1: Install correctly the ink tank named in the
message. (→ P.4-2)
Problem2: A problem has occurred with the ink tank
indicated on the display.
Solution1: Replace the ink tank with a new one.
(→ P.4-2)

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Solution1: Open the right cover and install a new ink tank
for the color that is flashing on the printer
operation panel. (→ P.4-2)

6- 11

Contents
Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Check Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank

Not Enough Ink

Problem1: The installed ink tank named in the display by
the color of its holder cannot be used.

Problem1: Ink in the tank is low and there is not enough ink
for Head Cleaning B, or any other job that
requires a large amount of ink.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Solution1: Make sure that the ink tank indicated on the
display is installed correctly. (→ P.4-2)

Important
z If the ink does not eject properly as a result of installing
the wrong ink tank, or if the images are very poor
quality, and the Bk tank was mistakenly installed,
perform the ChangeBkInkType operation (→ P.4-48).
If you mistakenly installed any other ink cartridge,
perform the Move Printer operation, and then install
new ink tanks. (→ P.4-32)
Problem2: A problem has occurred with the ink tank
indicated on the display.
Solution1: Replace the ink tank with a new one.
(→ P.4-2)

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Solution1: Replace the ink tank where the ink level is low.
(→ P.4-2)

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Ink level?
Problem1: The ink level detection function is set to off.
Solution1: This message is displayed every time a print job
is executed and the printer goes offline. Press
the Online button to continue printing.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Solution2: To retrieve the ink level display, replace with the
ink tanks specified for use with this printer.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 12

Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Remove Ink Tank

No MT-Cartridge

Problem1: While the Move Printer message is displayed,
the right cover is closed without removing the ink
tanks.

Problem1: A maintenance cartridge is not installed.

Solution1: Remove the ink tank.

Check MT-Cart.

Chk Bk Ink Type

Problem1: The maintenance cartridge installed is either
used (full) or is a maintenance cartridge that
cannot be used with this printer.

Problem1: The black ink type does not match the loaded
media.
Solution1: Check the black ink setting in the printer driver
and make sure that it is correct.
Solution2: In the printer driver check the media selection
setting to determine whether the selected media
type is a type that cannot be used with the
current black ink type. (→ P.2-2)

MTCart Full Soon
Problem1: The maintenance cartridge is almost full.
Solution1: The current print job can continue. Obtain a new
MT cartridge.

Replace MT-Cart

Solution1: Install a maintenance cartridge. (→ P.4-16)

Solution1: Install a new maintenance cartridge intended for
use with this printer. (→ P.4-16)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Problem1: The maintenance cartridge is full.
Solution1: Replace the maintenance cartridge after
stopping the print job. (→ P.4-16)

6- 13

Contents
Index

Responding to Error Messages

Other Messages
Close xxx Cover (xxx name of the cover)
Problem1: The named cover is open.

Solution1: Close the cover named in display on the
operation panel.

Reset Lever
Problem1: Open the release lever.

TOP
Check Head Hght L/M/H → L/M/H
Problem1: The current height of the printhead (displayed at
the left end of the bottom display line) is not the
appropriate height (displayed at the right end of
the bottom display line) for printing on the type of
media loaded for the print job.
Solution1: Confirm the height (H/M/L) named at the right
end of the bottom display line, then perform
procedure below to adjust the height of the print
head.
1. Press the Online button to set the printer
offline.
2. Hold down [ ] or [ ] for more than 1 sec. to
move the carriage to the center.
3. Open the upper cover.
4. Set the printhead height adjustment lever to
the correct position for the media.
5. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Solution1: Pull the release lever toward you to close it.

6- 14

Contents
Index

Responding to Error Messages

TOP

Turn Power Off!!

Problem3: A problem occurred in the printer.

Problem1: The tape inside the upper cover or the belt
stopper has not been removed.

Solution1: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds,
then switch the printer on again.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Solution2: If the message appears again after performing
the procedure above, read the content of the
message and write down the first line, switch the
printer off, then contact a Canon service center.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

No Printhead

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Problem1: The printhead is not installed.
Solution1: Install the printhead correctly. (→ P.4-24)
Solution1: Switch the printer off, open the upper cover,
remove the tape and belt stopper, then press the
Power button. (→ Quick Start Guide)
Problem2: Media has jammed in the printer.

Error!
E02E01
Turn Power Off!!

Solution1: Switch the printer off and remove the jammed
sheet, reset the media, then switch the printer on
again. (→ P.6-35)

6- 15

Printhead Error!
Problem1: A problem has occurred with the printhead.
Solution1: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds,
then switch the printer on again.
Solution2: If the message appears again after performing
the procedure above, read the content of the
message and write down the first line, switch the
printer off, then contact a Canon service center.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Responding to Error Messages

Check Printhead

Scale Read Error

Problem1: A printhead that cannot be used with the printer
is installed.

Problem1: A problem has occurred with the carriage.

Solution1: Install the printhead for this printer. (→ P.4-24)
Problem2: Printhead abnormal.
Solution1: Open the upper cover. If the carriage is out,
replace the printhead. (→ P.4-23)
Solution2: If the carriage is in, close the upper cover, press
the Online button, select Replace P.head then
replace the printhead. (→ P.4-23)
Problem3: If you see this message when the print job starts,
the condition of the printhead is poor and cannot
eject ink properly.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Solution1: Open the upper cover and make sure a foreign
object has not fallen into the printer.
Solution2: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds,
then switch the printer on again.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Solution3: If the message appears again after performing
the procedure above, read the content of the
message and write down the first line, switch the
printer off, then contact a Canon service center.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Mist Full Soon

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Problem1: The printer mist processing is full.

Solution1: Press the Stop/Eject button to stop the print job,
perform Head Cleaning B, then start the print job
again. (→ P.4-38)
If this does not solve the problem, replace the
printhead. (→ P.4-24)

Solution1: Printing can continue. While performing a long
print job or borderless printing, you can pause a
print job so you can contact a Canon service
center.

Solution2: Although you can perform the print job if you
press the Online button, the print quality may
become poor.

Mist Count Error

Problem4: Ink is not filled in the printhead properly.

Solution1: Read the message in the display and jot down
the content of the message, switch the printer
off, then contact a Canon service center.

Solution1: Remove all ink tanks and reinsert them properly.
(→ P.4-2)

6- 16

TOP

Problem1: The printer has reached the limit for ink mist
processing.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

Responding to Error Messages

Adj. Failed

ERROR

Problem1: Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Problem1: Error in the print data.

Solution1: Reload the media and then print the nozzle
check pattern to check the condition of the
nozzles. (→ P.4-36) If the printhead is not
operating properly, perform Head Cleaning.
(→ P.4-38)

Solution1: If the job does not print correctly, check the
settings then restart the print job.

Problem2: The high-transparency film for which the
printhead or amount of line feed cannot be
adjusted is loaded. (→ P.4-40, P.4-42)
Solution1: When you adjust the printhead (Auto Head
Adj.), you should use the media of the type
(other than film) that you use most frequently.
(→ P.4-40)

nnnnnn (n = Numbers)
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Solution2: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds,
then switch the printer on again.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Solution3: If the message appears again after performing
the procedure above, write down the number of
the error displayed in the first line, switch the
printer off, then contact a Canon service center.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Solution2: To adjust the amount of line feed (Adjust Band),
perform the procedure for “Adjusting Line Feed
Manually”. (→ P.4-43)

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Incorrect Value

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Problem1: The IP address, subnet mask setting, or the
default gateway setting is not correct.
Solution1: Set the correct settings for the IP address,
subnet mask and default gateway. For more
details about the values of the printer network
information settings, contact your system
administrator. (P.5-5)

6- 17

TOP

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

When You Cannot Print

TOP

When You Cannot Print

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Check the following items when the printer does not operate and will not print.
Printing Will Not Start

Printing Halts During Print Job

Cannot Print on Network

No error message is displayed

Error Message Displayed

Cannot Print from a TCP/IP
Network

Error Message Displayed

Ejected Paper Is Blank

Cannot Print on AppleTalk Network

Ink initialization operation starts
unexpectedly

Cannot print from the NetWare
network.
The printer is not recognized, even
with IP Print (Auto) selected with
Mac OS 8.6.

Problem1: The printer has not been selected as the
destination for the print job output.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Printing Will Not Start
No error message is displayed

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

Solution1: If you are using Windows, select the name of the
printer for Printer in the Print dialog box and
then try to print again.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 18

Index

When You Cannot Print

Solution2: If you are using Mac OS 8/9, make sure that the
correct name of the printer is selected with the
Chooser, then try again.

TOP
Solution1: Windows:
1. Select the icon for the printer in the Printer
folder.
2. From the File menu select Pause Printing to
release this setting.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives

Solution3: For Mac OS X, select the name of the printer for
Printer in the Print dialog box and then try to
print again.

Solution2: Mac OS 8/9:
1. Open GARO Printmonitor.
2. From the File menu select Resume Printing
to release the print pause.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Problem2: The print queue has halted.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 19

Index

When You Cannot Print

Solution3: Mac OS X:
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility (Print Center).
2. From the Printers menu select Start Jobs to
release the print pause.

TOP
Error Message Displayed
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Problem1: Media jam has occurred.

Error!
E02E01
Turn Power Off!!

Problem3: With Mac OS 8/9, the printer is shared via USB.
Solution1: Connect the printer directly to the computer to be
used for printing through its USB or IEEE1394
port. If you want to share the printer, perform the
print job from a Windows computer.

Solution1: Remove the jammed sheets. (→ P.6-35)
Problem2: The printer went offline.
Solution1: After correcting the problem in response to the
error message, press the Online button to set
the printer online.
Solution2: If the operation panel display reads Offline
press the Online button to set the printer online.
Problem3: A problem occurred during printing.
Solution1: When an error message appears in the printer
operation panel or the Windows display, read the
message in the GARO Status Monitor, or in the
GARO Printmonitor for Macintosh, then correct
the problem. (→ P.6-2)

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Problem4: No print media loaded.
Solution1: Replenish the print media in the specified media
supply source.

6- 20

Contents
Index

When You Cannot Print

TOP

Problem5: The media type in the media source selection is
not selected.

Printing Halts During Print Job

Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select the
correct setting for the media type. (→ P.2-32)

Error Message Displayed

Solution2: If the media type selection is incorrect, cancel
the print job in the computer side, open the
printer driver and select the correct setting for
the print media loaded. (→ P.1-46, P.2-4)

Problem1: An error message is displayed during printing.

Problem6: No ink.
Solution1: When the ink tank replacement message
appears, replace the ink tank for the indicated
color. (→ P.4-2)

Ink initialization operation starts unexpectedly

Solution1: Read the message displayed in the GARO
Status Monitor or GARO Printmonitor, and
correct the problem indicated by the error
message. (→ P.6-2)
Problem2: Roll media ran out during the print job and the
tape on the trailing edge of the media sheet is
preventing the rest of the sheet from feeding.
Solution1: Follow the procedure for removing a media jam.
Remove the used roll and replace it with a new
one. (→ P.6-35)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Problem1: When the printer was switched off previously,
this force cancelled a cleaning operation.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Solution1: Wait for the ink initialization operation to finish.
Ink filling may require up to 10 minutes to
complete.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 21

Index

When You Cannot Print

Ejected Paper Is Blank
Problem1: A blank page is ejected from the previous print
job.
Solution1: The print job starts after the blank page is
ejected.
Problem2: The leading edge of the roll media is cut to an
even length.
Solution1: When the roll was loaded, a plain cut sheet was
ejected as part of the normal procedure to align
the roll media correctly. When the preparation is
finished, the printer is ready to print.
Problem3: Printhead nozzles are blocked.
Solution1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the
condition of the printhead. If a nozzle is blocked,
perform the printhead cleaning procedure.
(→ P.4-38)
Problem4: An ink tank has run out of ink.
Solution1: Check the ink tanks and replace any empty ink
tanks. (→ P.4-2)
Problem5: Printer is damaged.
Solution1: Contact a Canon service center.

TOP
Cannot Print on Network
Cannot Print from a TCP/IP Network
Problem1: The LAN port and network cable are not
connected correctly.
Solution1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
connects the printer to the network is secure,
then press the Power button to cycle the printer
off and on again. (→ P.5-5)
Problem2: The printer cannot recognize automatically the
LAN communication method.
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select
Interface Setup > Ethernet Driver then set
each item for the communication method that is
being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-5)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer

Problem3: The TCP/IP network is not set correctly.

Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment

Solution1: Confirm that the IP Address is set correctly.
(→ P.5-7)

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 22

Index

When You Cannot Print

Problem4: The settings for the computer used for printing
are not set correctly.
Solution1: Confirm the following points:
1. Correct printer driver installed?
The printer driver must be installed on every
computer that will be printing from Windows.
2. Is the output destination port set correctly for
every computer that will be used for printing?
Select Printers under Control Panel to
check the output destination.

TOP
Cannot Print on AppleTalk Network
Problem1: The LAN port and network cable are not
connected correctly.
Solution1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
connects the printer to the network is secure,
then press the Power button to cycle the printer
off and on again. (→ P.5-5)
Problem2: The printer cannot recognize automatically the
LAN communication method.
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select
Interface Setup > Ethernet Driver then set
each item for the communication method that is
being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-5)
Problem3: The AppleTalk protocol has not been enabled for
the printer.

Problem5: The name of the file you are trying to print is too
long.
Solution1: Normally, LPR (with Windows NT: Microsoft
TCP/IP printing) sends the job name based on
the name of the software application and the
name of the file. However, if the name of the job
is more than 255 characters, LPR cannot send
the job. In such a case, shorten the name of the
file.

6- 23

Solution1: Follow the procedure below to use the Remote
UI to enable the AppleTalk protocol.
1. Open the Remote UI and log in as an Administrator.
2. On the Device Manager menu, click Network.
3. Click the Edit button under AppleTalk.
4. Under Phase Type select Phase 2, then
under Zone select the Zone where the printer
is located, then click the OK button (if zones
have not been set for the network, you will
see an asterisk (*) displayed).
5. Return to the Network page of the Remote
UI and click the Reset button.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

When You Cannot Print

Problem4: The computer and the printer are not on the
same network.
Solution1: If the number of routers are exceeded with the
Zeroconf function, the computer cannot connect
to the printer if it is on a different network.
Connect the computer and printer to the same
network. For more about the network settings,
please contact the network manager.
Problem5: The settings for the computer used for printing
are not set correctly.
Solution1: Mac OS 8.6/9x:
1. Open Chooser from the Apple menu.
2. Under AppleTalk make sure that Active is
selected.

TOP
3. Under AppleTalk in the Control Panels of
the Apple menu, make sure that the printer is
selected for connection to the correct port for
the destination.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media

4. In Chooser make sure that the GARO Printer
Driver is installed.
5. In Chooser, select GARO Printer Driver,
and under Destination select AppleTalk,
then select again the name of the printer in
the printer list.

Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 24

Index

When You Cannot Print

Solution2: Mac OS X:
1. Open Network for System Preferences.
2. Under Show, select the name of the LAN port
where the printer is connected.
3. Open the AppleTalk panel and make sure
that Make AppleTalk Active is checked on.

TOP
Cannot print from the NetWare network.
Problem1: The printer LAN port and cable are not
connected correctly.
Solution1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
connects the printer to the network is secure,
then press the Power button to cycle the printer
off and on again. (→ P.5-5)
Problem2: The printer cannot recognize automatically the
LAN communication method.
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select
Interface Setup > Ethernet Driver then set
each item for the communication method that is
being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-5)
Problem3: The NetWare network is not set correctly.

4. Open Printer Setup Utility (Print Center)
and make sure that the name of this printer is
displayed in the printer list. If the name is not
displayed, click the Add button to add the
name of the printer.
5. If the name of the printer does not display
after clicking the Add button, use the provided User Software CD-ROM to reinstall the
printer driver for the printer.

6- 25

Solution1: Confirm the following points:
1. Make sure that the NetWare file server is running.
2. Is there enough disk space available on the
NetWare file server? You may not be able to
perform large print jobs if there is not enough
free space available.
3. Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and confirm
(1) that the print service is set correctly, and
(2) that the print queue has been enabled for
use. (→ P.5-38)
4. Make sure that the printer network settings
are correct. Especially, confirm that a frame
type is enabled for the Frame Type setting.
(→ P.5-20, P.5-34)

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents
Index

When You Cannot Print

TOP

Problem4: The settings for the computer used for printing
are not set correctly.

The printer is not recognized, even with IP Print
(Auto) selected with Mac OS 8.6.

Solution1: Confirm the following points:
1. Correct printer driver installed? Before printing, the printer driver must be installed on
every computer. (→ P.5-31)
2. Is the output destination port set correctly for
every computer that will be used for printing?
Select Printers under Control Panel to
check the output destination.

Problem1: With OS 8.6 when the router on the network
cannot be recognized, communication cannot be
performed with TCP/IP.

Problem5: A print job data stream cannot be sent from the
NetWare server to a printer in another subnet.
Solution1: When data is sent from NetWare to the printer,
the data is sent in the NCP Burst mode, but in
some network environments data sent to a
printer on another subnet is lost. If this problem
occurs, switch off the NCP Burst mode under the
printer protocol settings and try again.
Problem6: Parallel is selected for the printer type when
using the queue server in the queue server
mode.
Solution1: Select Other/Unknown for the printer type.

Solution1: With Chooser select Destination > Registering
IP Address and register the printer IP address,
then with Chooser select Destination > IP Print
then select the printer name of the registered IP
address.
Solution2: With Chooser select Destination > AppleTalk
and select the printer name.
Solution3: Use Mac OS 9.0.4 or later if you want to operate
the printer with IP Print (Auto).
Solution4: Locate the printer and Macintosh in the same
subnet, then assign them fixed IP addresses.
Solution5: If there is a DHCP server in the network, locate
the printer and Macintosh in the same subnet,
then assign the IP addresses from the DHCP
server.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Network Environment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus

Contents

6- 26

Index

Unexpected Printing Results

TOP

Unexpected Printing Results
If the results you see in the print job are not what you expect, check the items described below.
Poor Quality

Abnormal Content

Canon Imageprograf W6400 Users Manual User's Guide

If not then W6400UG_Us Manual: ://s.canon.com/cpr/software/wideformat/W6400_Manuals/W6400UG_Us

W6400 to the manual 50e3ced5-d758-4ce5-b29d-21055202215b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation